Chemistry Books

Book SynopsisAn indispensable resource for researchers and students in materials science, chemistry, physics, and pharmaceuticals Written by one of the pioneers of 2D X-Ray Diffraction, this updated and expanded edition of the definitive text in the field provides comprehensive coverage of the fundamentals of that analytical method, as well as state-of-the art experimental methods and applications. Geometry convention, x-ray source and optics, two-dimensional detectors, diffraction data interpretation, and configurations for various applications, such as phase identification, texture, stress, microstructure analysis, crystallinity, thin film analysis, and combinatorial screening are all covered in detail. Numerous experimental examples in materials research, manufacture, and pharmaceuticals are provided throughout. Two-dimensional x-ray diffraction is the ideal, non-destructive analytical method for examining samples of all kinds including metals, polymers, ceramics, semiconTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 X-Ray Technology, a Brief History, 1 1.2 Geometry of Crystals, 2 1.3 Principles of X-Ray Diffraction, 11 1.4 Reciprocal Space and Diffraction, 13 1.5 Two-Dimensional X-Ray Diffraction, 19 References, 26 2. Geometry and Fundamentals 29 2.1 Introduction, 29 2.2 Diffraction Space and Laboratory Coordinates, 31 2.3 Detector Space and Detector Geometry, 35 2.4 Sample Space and Goniometer Geometry, 46 2.5 Transformation from Diffraction Space to Sample Space, 50 2.6 Reciprocal Space, 52 2.7 Summary, 53 References, 55 3. X-Ray Source and Optics 57 3.2 X-Ray Optics, 63 References, 85 4. X-Ray Detectors 87 4.1 History of X-Ray Detection Technology, 87 4.2 Point Detectors in Conventional Diffractometers, 89 4.3 Characteristics of Point Detectors, 92 4.4 Line Detectors, 100 4.5 Characteristics of Area Detectors, 107 4.6 Types of Area Detectors, 119 References, 137 5. Goniometer and Sample Stages 141 5.1 Goniometer and Sample Position, 141 5.2 Goniometer Accuracy, 145 5.3 Sample Alignment and Visualization Systems, 149 5.4 Environment Stages, 151 References, 155 6. Data Treatment 157 6.1 Introduction, 157 6.2 Non-Uniform Response Correction, 157 6.3 Spatial Correction, 161 6.4 Detector Position Accuracy and Calibration, 166 6.5 Frame Integration, 177 6.6 Multiple Frame Merge, 186 6.7 Scanning 2D Pattern, 194 6.8 Lorentz, Polarization, and Absorption Corrections, 197 References, 208 7. Phase Identification 211 7.1 Introduction, 211 7.2 Relative Intensity, 212 7.3 Geometry and Resolution, 216 7.4 Sampling Statistics, 221 7.5 Preferred Orientation Effect, 227 References, 233 8. Texture Analysis 235 8.1 Introduction, 235 8.2 Pole Density and Pole-Figure, 236 8.3 Fundamental Equations, 238 8.4 Data Collection Strategy, 242 8.5 Texture Data Process, 251 8.6 Orientation Distribution Function, 256 8.7 Fiber Texture, 261 8.8 Polymer Texture, 264 8.9 Other Advantages of XRD2 for Texture, 268 References, 269 9. Stress Measurement 271 9.1 Introduction, 271 9.2 Principle of X-ray Stress Analysis, 280 9.3 Theory of Stress Analysis with XRD2, 292 9.4 Process of Stress Measurement with XRD2, 307 9.5 Experimental Examples, 325 A9.1 Calculate Principal Stresses, 349 A9.2 Calculate the direction cosines for principal stresses (Eigenvectors), 350 References, 353 10. Small Angle X-ray Scattering 357 10.1 Introduction, 357 10.2 2D SAXS Systems, 361 10.3 Applications Examples, 367 10.4 Some Innovations in 2D SAXS, 370 References, 374 11. Combinatorial Screening 379 11.1 Introduction, 379 11.2 XRD2 Systems for High Throughput Screening, 380 11.3 Combined Screening with XRD2 and Raman, 390 Reference, 393 12. Miscellaneous Applications 395 12.1 Percent Crystallinity, 395 12.2 Crystal Size, 402 12.3 Retained Austenite, 412 12.4 Crystal Orientation, 414 12.5 Thin Film Analysis, 418 Reference, 429 13. Innovation and Future Development 433 13.1 Introduction, 433 13.2 Scanning Line Detector for XRD2, 434 13.3 Three-Dimensional Detector, 438 13.4 Pixel Direct Diffraction Analysis, 441 13.5 High Resolution Two-Dimensional X-Ray Diffractometer, 444 References, 451 Appendix A. Values of Commonly Used Parameters 453 Appendix B. Symbols 459 Index 465

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnderstanding the impact of diet, exercise, genetics, and hormones on the risk and development of Alzheimer's and other neurogenerative diseases Diet is widely known to impact on neurological function. Nevertheless, academic texts discussing this relationship are relatively few in number. This book therefore fills an important gap in the current literature. Opening with an overview of neurodegenerative diseases, particularly Alzheimer's disease, the text then focuses on explaining the means by which glycemic control and lipid metabolism and associated nutritional and lifestyle variables may factor into such disorders' prevention and treatment. An international group of experts in the fields of food science and neurodegeneration have contributed chapters that examine Alzheimer's disease within a broad range of contexts. Offering dietary, genetic, and hormonal perspectives, the authors explore topics ranging from sugar consumption to digestive fermentation, andTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv 1 Current Understanding of Alzheimer’s Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Diseases, and the Potential Role of Diet and Lifestyle in Reducing the Risks of Alzheimer’s Disease and Cognitive Decline 1Charles S. Brennan, Margaret A. Brennan, W.M.A.D. Binosha Fernando and Ralph N. Martins References 7 2 Alzheimer’s Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Diseases 9Stephanie J. Fuller, Hamid R. Sohrabi, Kathryn G. Goozee, Anoop Sankaranarayanan and Ralph N. Martins 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Alzheimer’s Disease 9 2.2.1 Pathology 9 2.2.2 Symptoms 10 2.2.3 Incidence 11 2.2.4 Onset and Risk Factors 12 2.2.5 Treatment 12 2.2.6 Potential for AD Prevention 13 2.3 Frontotemporal Lobe Dementia 13 2.3.1 Neuropathology and Causes 14 2.3.2 Treatment 15 2.3.3 Diagnosis and Clinical Overlap with Other Diseases 15 2.4 Vascular Dementia 16 2.4.1 Symptoms and Diagnosis 16 2.4.2 Causes and Risk Factors 16 2.4.3 Prevention and Treatment 17 2.4.4 Dementia with Lewy Bodies 18 2.4.5 Causes 18 2.4.6 Symptoms 18 2.4.7 Diagnosis of DLB 18 2.4.7.1 Clinical Approach to Dementias 19 2.5 Parkinson’s Disease 19 2.5.1 Onset 22 2.5.2 Causes and Risk Factors 22 2.5.3 Incidence 22 2.5.4 Pathology 22 2.5.5 Treatment 23 2.6 Huntington’s Disease 24 2.6.1 Genetics of the Disease 24 2.6.2 Incidence and Prevalence 25 2.6.3 Pathology 25 2.6.4 Treatment 26 2.7 Motor Neuron Diseases 27 2.7.1 Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis 27 2.7.2 Spinal Muscular Atrophy 27 2.7.3 Hereditary Spastic Paraplegia 27 2.7.4 Onset of MND and Differential Diagnosis 28 2.7.5 Incidence, Causes, and Risk Factors 28 2.7.6 Pathology 29 2.7.7 Treatment 30 2.8 Prion Diseases 30 2.8.1 Causes 31 2.8.2 Symptoms and Diagnosis 31 2.8.3 Treatment 32 2.8.4 Differential Diagnosis of the Various Types of Dementia 32 2.8.5 DLB Treatment 33 2.9 Summary 33 References 34 3 Current and Developing Methods for Diagnosing Alzheimer’s Disease 43Stephanie J. Fuller, Nicholas Carrigan, Hamid R. Sohrabi and Ralph N. Martins 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Classical Post-Mortem Diagnosis 43 3.2.1 Plaques 44 3.2.2 Neurofibrillary Tangles (NFT) 44 3.2.3 Cerebral Amyloid Angiopathy (CAA) 44 3.2.4 Glial Responses 45 3.2.5 Brain Shrinkage 45 3.2.6 Loss of Synapses and Neurons 45 3.3 Clinical Diagnosis 45 3.3.1 Initial Assessment/Screening Tools 47 3.3.1.1 Mini-Mental State Examination (MMSE) 47 3.3.1.2 Montreal Cognitive Assessment (MoCA) 47 3.3.1.3 Clinical Dementia Rating (CDR) 47 3.3.1.4 Clock Drawing 48 3.3.1.5 Seven-Minute Screen 48 3.3.1.6 Alzheimer’s Disease Assessment Scale (ADAS-Cog) 48 3.3.1.7 Psychogeriatric Assessment Scales (PAS) 48 3.3.1.8 Dementia Rating Scale (DRS) 49 3.3.1.9 Mini-Cog 49 3.3.1.10 Rowland Universal Dementia Assessment Scale (RUDAS) 49 3.3.1.11 The Consortium to Establish a Registry for Alzheimer’s Disease (CERAD) Neuropsychological Battery (nb) and Other Tests 49 3.4 Brain Imaging in the Diagnosis of Alzheimer’s Disease and Other Dementias 51 3.4.1 Imaging Tests in AD Diagnosis: Established Tests 51 3.4.1.1 Computed Tomography (CT) 51 3.4.1.2 Electroencephalography (EEG) 51 3.4.1.3 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), for the Assessment of Morphological Changes, and the Detection of Stroke 52 3.4.1.4 Positron Emission Tomography (PET) 52 3.4.1.5 FDG-PET 52 3.4.2 Imaging Tests in AD Diagnosis: More Recently Developed Tests 52 3.4.2.1 MRI for Measuring Regional Blood Flow 53 3.4.2.2 Single Photon Emission Computed Tomography (SPECT) Scan 54 3.4.2.3 PiB-PET 54 3.4.3 The Rapidly Evolving Diagnostic Criteria 55 3.4.4 CSF Biomarkers of AD 56 3.4.4.1 Aβ, Tau, and AβPP-Related Biomarkers 56 3.4.4.2 Other Potential CSF Protein Biomarkers 57 3.4.4.3 Potential Lipid Biomarkers in the CSF 58 3.4.5 Blood Biomarkers of AD 60 3.4.5.1 Aβ Peptides in Plasma 60 3.4.5.2 Other Potential Blood Biomarkers 62 3.4.5.3 Blood Proteins 62 3.4.6 Blood Lipids 64 3.4.7 Metabolites 65 3.4.8 Blood Platelets 66 3.4.9 Genetic Risk Factors 67 3.4.10 The Eye as a Window to the Brain 68 3.4.11 miRNA Tests 69 3.5 Conclusions 71 References 72 4 The Link Between Diabetes, Glucose Control, and Alzheimer’s Disease and Neurodegenerative Diseases 89Giuseppe Verdile, Paul E. Fraser and Ralph N.Martins 4.1 Introduction 89 4.2 The Impact of Type 2 Diabetes on the Brain 90 4.3 Evidence from Cell Culture, Animal, and Clinical Studies 93 4.3.1 CNS Insulin Signalling and Disruptions in AD 93 4.3.2 The Accumulation of Aβ Is Associated with Impaired Insulin Signalling 94 4.3.3 Insulin Resistance Promotes the Accumulation of Aβ 95 4.3.4 Impairments in Insulin Signalling Can Induce Hyperphosphorylation of Tau 96 4.3.5 Type 2 Diabetes and Neuroinflammation 96 4.3.6 Oxidative Stress and Mitochondrial Dysfunction in T2D and AD 97 4.3.7 Targeting Type 2 Diabetes to Slow Down Progression/Prevent Neurodegeneration and Cognitive Decline 99 4.4 Conclusions 103 References 103 5 Diet and Nutrition, and their Influence on Alzheimer’s Disease and other Neurodegenerative Diseases 117Stephanie R. Rainey-Smith, Rhona Creegan, Stephanie J. Fuller, Michele L. Callisaya and Velandai Srikanth 5.1 Introduction 117 5.2 Dietary Patterns 118 5.3 Key Macronutrients 119 5.3.1 Dietary Fatty Acids 119 5.3.2 Cholesterol 120 5.3.3 Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids 121 5.3.4 Dietary Carbohydrates 122 5.4 Key Micronutrients 124 5.4.1 Water Soluble Vitamins 125 5.4.1.1 B Vitamins 125 5.4.2 Fat Soluble Vitamins 128 5.4.2.1 Vitamin A (Retinol, Retinal, and Retinoic Acid) 128 5.4.2.2 Vitamin D 129 5.4.2.3 Vitamin E 130 5.4.3 Dietary Minerals 131 5.4.3.1 Selenium 131 5.4.3.2 Manganese 132 5.4.3.3 Zinc, Iron, Copper, and Calcium 132 5.5 Conclusion 134 References 135 6 Carbohydrate and Protein Metabolism: Influences on Cognition and Alzheimer’s Disease 149W.M.A.D. Binosha Fernando, Veer B. Gupta, Vijay Jayasena, Charles S. Brennan and Ralph N.Martins 6.1 Carbohydrates 149 6.1.1 Carbohydrate Digestion 149 6.1.2 Glucose Ingestion and Use 151 6.1.3 Glucose and Insulin, Insulin Resistance, and Type 2 Diabetes (Short Summary) 151 6.1.4 Relative Intake of Carbohydrate and Its Impacts on Neurodegenerative Disease Risk 152 6.1.5 Ketogenic Diets 154 6.1.6 Glucose and Its Effects on Cognition 154 6.1.7 Possible Mechanisms Related to Memory Enhancement with Glucose 157 6.1.7.1 Glucose and the Hippocampus 158 6.1.7.2 Glucose Availability in Brain Cells 158 6.1.7.3 Glucose and the Central Cholinergic System 159 6.1.7.4 ATP-Regulated Potassium (K-ATP) Channels and Brain Control of Glucose Homeostasis 159 6.1.7.5 Effects of High Fructose Diets 160 6.1.7.6 Sucrose 161 6.2 Proteins 161 6.2.1 Protein Metabolism in General 162 6.2.2 Links Between Specific Amino Acids and Brain Function 163 6.2.2.1 Tryptophan 163 6.2.2.2 Tyrosine 164 6.2.3 Clinical Studies of Protein Supplementation 165 6.2.4 Links Between Loss of Protein Function and Neurodegeneration 167 6.2.5 Clearance Mechanisms Associated with Proteinopathies Involved in Neurodegeneration 168 6.2.6 Role of Protein Crosslinking and Inflammation in Neurodegeneration and AD 170 6.3 Conclusion 171 References 171 7 Fat and Lipid Metabolism and the Involvement of Apolipoprotein E in Alzheimer’s Disease 189Eugene Hone, Florence Lim and Ian J. Martins 7.1 Introduction 189 7.2 Alzheimer’s Disease 189 7.3 Cholesterol and Lipid Metabolism 190 7.3.1 Cholesterol Synthesis and Metabolism 190 7.3.2 Oxysterols 191 7.3.2.1 Oxysterols in AD 191 7.3.3 Pathways of Dietary (Exogenous) Lipid Homeostasis 192 7.3.4 Pathways of Endogenous Lipid Homeostasis 193 7.3.5 Peripheral Clearance of Lipoproteins and Reverse Cholesterol Transport 195 7.3.5.1 Lipoproteins in the CNS 197 7.4 Apolipoprotein E Alleles and Isoforms 197 7.4.1 ApoE in the Brain 198 7.4.2 Apolipoprotein E and Alzheimer’s Disease 198 7.4.2.1 ApoE Binding to Aβ 199 7.4.2.2 ApoE in the Cellular Clearance of Aβ 200 7.4.2.3 ApoE and Antioxidant Properties 201 7.4.2.4 ApoE and Tissue Transglutaminase 201 7.4.2.5 Apolipoprotein J (Clusterin, CLU) 202 7.5 LRP-1 in the Brain and Its Role in Aβ Clearance 203 7.5.1 LDL, HDL, and AD 203 7.5.2 Statins, Cholesterol, and AD 204 7.6 The Role of Lipid Rafts in Neurodegenerative Diseases 205 7.7 Changes to Glycerophospholipids in Alzheimer’s Disease 206 7.7.1 Omega-3 and Omega-6 Fatty Acids 207 7.7.1.1 Omega-3 Fatty Acids, Modern Diets, and Health Implications 208 7.8 Sphingolipids 208 7.8.1 Ceramides 208 7.8.2 Sulfatides 209 7.8.3 Gangliosides 209 7.9 Conclusions 210 References 210 8 Inflammation in Alzheimer’s Disease, and Prevention with Antioxidants and Phenolic Compounds –What Are the Most Promising Candidates? 233Matthew J. Sharman, Giuseppe Verdile, Shanmugam Kirubakaran and Gerald Münch 8.1 Introduction 233 8.2 Inflammation and the Immune Response in AD 233 8.2.1 The Role of Microglia and Astrocytes in Chronic Inflammation in AD 233 8.3 Oxidative Stress 236 8.3.1 Advanced Glycation End Products 237 8.3.2 Involvement of the Complement System in AD 238 8.3.3 Involvement of Cytokines and Chemokines in Inflammation 239 8.3.4 Inflammation – Susceptibility to Aβ Deposition or Aggregation 240 8.3.5 Inflammation Can Influence AβPP Metabolism and Aβ Clearance Directly 241 8.4 Current Medications for AD 242 8.4.1 Current Medications – Acetylcholinesterase Inhibitors and Memantine 242 8.5 Disease Modification and Treatment Approaches 243 8.5.1 Non-Steroidal Anti-Inflammatory Drugs (NSAID) 243 8.6 Some Anti-inflammatory Foods, Supplements, and Newly Developed Drugs for the Treatment of AD 244 8.6.1 Cinnamon/Cinnamaldehyde 244 8.6.2 (−)Epigallocatechin-3-Gallate (EGCG) and Other Green Tea Polyphenols 245 8.6.3 Curcumin 247 8.6.4 Other Polyphenolic Antioxidants 248 8.6.5 Omega-3 (n-3) Essential Fatty Acids 249 8.6.6 Lipoic Acid 250 8.7 Conclusion 253 References 253 9 Cognitive Impairments in Alzheimer’s Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Diseases 267Hamid R. Sohrabi and Michael Weinborn 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 Dementia due to Alzheimer’s Disease 268 9.2.1 Subjective Cognitive Decline [4] and Mild Cognitive Impairment (MCI) 268 9.2.2 Memory Impairments in AD 271 9.2.2.1 Episodic Memory 271 9.2.2.2 Semantic Memory 272 9.2.2.3 Prospective Memory (PM) 272 9.2.3 Attention and Executive Dysfunction in AD 273 9.2.4 Language 274 9.2.5 Visuospatial Abilities 276 9.2.6 Dementia with Lewy Bodies and Parkinson’s Disease with Dementia 276 9.2.7 Vascular Dementia 277 9.2.8 Frontotemporal Dementia 279 9.3 Conclusions 281 References 282 10 Animal Models of Alzheimer’s Disease 291Prashant Bharadwaj 10.1 Introduction 291 10.2 Transgenic Mouse Models 292 10.3 Knock-in AD Mice Models 296 10.4 Non-Transgenic and Other Mammalian Animal Models 297 10.5 Drug Development and Translational Issues 298 10.6 Correlations Between Animal Models of AD and Human AD 300 10.7 Experimental Design and Reporting 301 10.8 The Future of Animal Models in AD 302 References 303 11 The Products of Fermentation and Their Effects on Metabolism, Alzheimer’s Disease, and Other Neurodegenerative Diseases: Role of Short-Chain Fatty Acids (SCFA) 311W.M.A.D Binosha Fernando, Charles S. Brennan and Ralph N.Martins 11.1 Introduction 311 11.2 Fermentable Substrates and Short-Chain Fatty Acids 312 11.2.1 Colonic Microflora and Fermentation 313 11.2.1.1 Probiotics and Prebiotics 313 11.2.2 Propionic Acid (PPA) 315 11.2.3 Acetic Acid 315 11.2.4 Butyric Acid 315 11.2.5 Short-Chain Fatty Acids and Free Fatty-Acid Receptor Signalling 316 11.2.6 Short-Chain Fatty Acids and Energy Intake 316 11.2.7 Short-Chain Fatty Acids and Energy Expenditure 319 11.2.8 Regulation of Fatty-Acid Metabolism by SCFA 320 11.2.9 Effect of Short-Chain Fatty Acids on Glucose Regulation 320 11.2.10 Regulation of Cholesterol Metabolism by Short-Chain Fatty Acids 321 11.2.11 Regulation of Inflammation by Short-Chain Fatty Acids 322 11.2.12 Short-Chain Fatty Acids and Neuroprotection 324 11.3 Conclusions 325 References 326 12 Hormonal Expression Associated with Alzheimer’s Disease and Neurodegenerative Diseases 335Giuseppe Verdile, Anna M. Barron and Ralph N. Martins 12.1 The Hypothalamic–Pituitary–Gonadal (HPG) Axis 335 12.1.1 Dysregulation of the HPG Axis During Ageing 336 12.2 Roles for Sex Steroids and Gonadotropins in the Neurodegenerative Process in AD 339 12.2.1 Sex Steroids Modulate Aβ Accumulation 340 12.2.2 Sex Steroids and Oxidative Stress 342 12.2.3 Sex Steroids and Inflammation 344 12.2.4 Testosterone and Diabetes 346 12.2.5 A Role for Gonadotropins in AD Pathogenesis 347 12.3 Hormone-based Therapies 349 12.3.1 The Oestrogens 349 12.3.2 Testosterone Therapy 350 12.3.3 Selective Oestrogen or Androgen Receptor Modulators (SERM or SARM) 352 12.3.4 Gonadotropin-Lowering Agents 354 12.4 Conclusions 355 References 355 13 The Link Between Exercise and Mediation of Alzheimer’s Disease and Neurodegenerative Diseases 371Belinda Brown and Tejal M. Shah 13.1 Introduction 371 13.2 Physical Activity Promotes Health and Well-being 372 13.3 Neuroplasticity 372 13.4 The Link Between Physical Activity and Cognition Across the Human Lifespan 373 13.4.1 Childhood 373 13.4.2 Adulthood and Midlife 374 13.4.3 Older Adults 375 13.5 Physical Activity Reduces the Risk of Dementia and AD 376 13.6 Mechanisms Underlying the Relationship Between Exercise and Brain Health 376 13.6.1 Evidence from Molecular and Cellular Research 377 13.6.2 Neurotrophins 378 13.6.3 Hormonal Pathways 379 13.6.4 Cardiovascular and Metabolic Mechanisms 380 13.6.5 Evidence from Neuroimaging Studies 380 13.7 The Effect of Genetics on the Relationship Between Exercise and Brain Health 381 13.8 Future Directions 382 References 382 Contents xiii 14 Current and Prospective Treatments for Alzheimer’s Disease (and Other Neurodegenerative Diseases) 391Steve Pedrini, Mike Morici and Ralph N. Martins 14.1 Introduction 391 14.2 Current and Potential Medical Treatments 391 14.2.1 Treatments That Influence Neurotransmission 391 14.2.1.1 Cholinergic System 391 14.2.1.2 Other Neurotransmitters 396 14.2.2 Cholesterol-Lowering Medications 399 14.2.3 Immunotherapy 400 14.2.3.1 Active Immunotherapy (Aβ) 401 14.2.3.2 Active Immunotherapy (tau) 402 14.2.3.3 Passive Immunotherapy (Aβ) 402 14.2.3.4 Passive Immunotherapy (tau) 404 14.2.4 Targeting the Aβ-Producing Pathway 405 14.2.4.1 α-Secretase 406 14.2.4.2 β-Secretase 406 14.2.4.3 γ-Secretase 407 14.2.5 Other Compounds Affecting Aβ 408 14.2.6 Other Compounds Affecting Tau 410 14.2.7 Inflammatory Targets 411 14.3 Conclusions 412 References 412 15 The Role of Genetics in Alzheimer’s Disease and Parkinson’s Disease 443Tenielle Porter, Aleksandra K. Gozt, Francis L. Mastaglia and Simon M. Laws 15.1 Introduction 443 15.2 Genetics of Alzheimer’s Disease 444 15.3 Autosomal Dominant AD (ADAD) 445 15.3.1 Understanding the Importance of APP and the Presenilins in AD 445 15.4 Amyloid Precursor Protein (APP) 447 15.5 Presenilin 1 (PSEN1) 447 15.6 Presenilin 2 (PSEN2) 448 15.7 Genetic Contributions to Sporadic Late-Onset AD (LOAD) 449 15.8 Cholesterol Metabolism 449 15.8.1 Apolipoprotein E (APOE) 449 15.8.2 Clusterin (CLU) 452 15.8.3 ATP-Binding Cassette Transporter A7 (ABCA7) 453 15.9 Immune Response 454 15.9.1 Complement Receptor 1 (CR1) 454 15.9.2 CD33(Myeloid Cell Surface Antigen CD33; Sialic Acid-Binding Immunoglobulin-Like Lectin 3) 455 15.9.3 Membrane Spanning 4 Domains, Subfamily A (MS4A) 456 15.9.4 Triggering Receptor Expressed on Myeloid Cells 2 (TREM2) 456 15.9.5 Further Genetic Associations Implicating the Immune Response 457 15.10 Endocytosis 458 15.10.1 Bridging Integrator 1 (BIN1) 459 15.10.2 Phosphatidylinositol Binding Clathrin Assembly Lymphoid Myeloid Protein (PICALM) 460 15.10.3 CD2-Associated Protein (CD2AP) 461 15.10.4 Further Genetic Associations Implicating Endocytosis 462 15.10.5 Variants in APP and Genes for APP-Metabolising Proteins 463 15.10.6 Further Mechanisms Implicated Through Genetic Associations 464 15.11 Genetics of Parkinson’s Disease 465 15.12 Monogenic forms of PD 466 15.12.1 Autosomal Dominant Forms 466 15.12.1.1 PARK 1 (SNCA) 466 15.12.1.2 PARK 8 (LRRK2) 467 15.12.1.3 PARK 11 (GIGYF2) 468 15.12.1.4 PARK 17 (VPS35) 468 15.12.1.5 PARK 18 (EIF4G1) 468 15.12.2 Autosomal Recessive Forms 469 15.12.2.1 PARK 2 (PRKN) 469 15.12.2.2 PARK 6 (PINK 1) 469 15.12.2.3 PARK 7 (DJ-1) 470 15.12.2.4 PARK 9 (ATP13A2) 470 15.12.2.5 PARK 14 (PLA2G6) 470 15.12.2.6 PARK 15 (FBXO7) 471 15.12.3 Genetic Contributions to Late-Onset Sporadic PD (LOPD) 471 15.12.4 Common Variants in PD Genes 471 15.12.5 Glucocerebrosidase (GBA) 472 15.12.6 Immune-Inflammatory Genes 472 15.12.7 Mitochondrial DNA Variants 473 15.13 Conclusion 473 References 474 Final Thoughts Regarding Alzheimer’s Disease, Diet, and Health 499Charles S. Brennan, Margaret A. Brennan, W.M.A.D. Binosha Fernando, Stephanie J. Fuller and Ralph N.Martins List of Abbreviations 503 Index 511

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe conceptualization and formulation of skin care products intended for topical use is a multifaceted and evolving area of science. Formulators must account for myriad skin types, emerging opportunities for product development as well as a very temperamental retail market. Originally published as Apply Topically in 2013 (now out of print), this reissued detailed and comprehensive handbook offers a practical approach to the formulation chemist''s day-to-day endeavors by: Addressing the innumerable challenges facing the chemist both in design and at the bench, such as formulating with/for specific properties; formulation, processing and production techniques; sensory and elegancy; stability and preservation; color cosmetics; sunscreens; Offering valuable guidance to troubleshooting issues regarding ingredient selection and interaction, regulatory concerns that must be addressed early in development, and the extrapolation of preservative systems, fragranceTable of ContentsPreface ix Section I Preliminary Considerations and Selection of Raw Materials 1 Pre-formulation Design and Considerations 3 Howard Epstein 2 The Use of Thickeners in Topically Applied Formulations 29 Jed Riemer and Tom Russo 3 The Incorporation of Delivery Systems into Topical Formulations: A Case Study on the Use of Salicylic Acid for Acne Treatment 45 Nripen S. Sharma, Bryan Grossman and Sam Shefer 4 Formulating Skin Care Products with Silicones: Approaches and Strategies 59 Bartley Maxon and Michael Starch 5 The Use of Corn-derived Ingredients in Personal Care Applications 115 Cindy Yu Section II Formulation, Processing and Production Techniques 6 Emulsions and their Characterization by Texture Profile Analysis 131 Roger L. McMullen, Mihaela Gorcea and Susan Chen 7 High Internal Phase Water-in-oil Emulsions 155 Paul Thau Introduction 155 8 Manufacturing Topical Formulations: Scale-up from Lab to Pilot Production 167 Michael Kimball 9 Foam: A Unique Delivery Vehicle for Topically Applied Formulations 233 Dov Tamarkin Section III Testing and Measurements Methods 10 Using Experimental Design to Optimize Formulations 263 Joseph Albanese 11 Rheological Properties of Topical Formulations 287 Hemi Nae 12 Viscosity Measurement for Topically Applied Formulations 346 Daphne Benderly 13 Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Spectroscopic Imaging Analysis of Topical Formulations 369 Samuel Gourion-Arsiquaud, Joel Coret, and David J. Moore Section IV Sensory and Elegancy 14 Creating Appealing Topically Applied Formulations: Linking Physical Aspects to Marketing Psychology 381 J. Mark Chandler 15 The Use of Fragrance in Topically Applied Formulations 397 Steve Herman Section V Stability and Preservation 16 Stability Testing for Topical Formulation Development 427 Gary R. Kelm 17 Preservation of Topical Formulations: An Historical and Practical Overview 463 Slawomir Paul Cebulski 18 Microbiological Stability for Skin Care Formulations 485 Kausar Malik Section VI Color Cosmetics 19 Lip Care Product Formulation Strategies 513 Daniel Sango and David Binder 20 Formulation of Nail Care Products 539 Robert W. Sandewicz Section VII Sunscreens 21 Formulation of Sunscreens in the United States Patricia Aikens 22 Formulating a Day Cream with SPF: A Case Study 611 Anne Pouillot and Rachel Ametsitsi Glossary of Terms, by Chapter 635 Author Biographies 655 Index 661

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents state-of-the-artinformation concerning the syntheses of valuable functionalized organic compounds from alkanes, with a focus on simple, mild, and green catalytic processes Alkane Functionalization offers a comprehensive review of the state-of-the-art of catalytic functionalization of alkanes under mild and green conditions. Written by a team of leading experts on the topic, the book examines the latest research developments in the synthesis of valuable functionalized organic compounds from alkanes. The authors describe the various modes of interaction of alkanes with metal centres and examine theoxidative alkane functionalization upon C-O bond formation. They address the many types of mechanisms, discuss typical catalytic systems and highlight the strategies inspired by biological catalytic systems. The book also describes alkane functionalization upon C-heteroatom bond formation as well as oxidative and non-oxidative approaches. In addition, the book explores non-transitioTable of ContentsAbout the editors List of contributors PrefaceArmando J.L. Pombeiro and M. Fátima C. Guedes da Silva Chapter 1 Alkane Functionalization: Introduction And OverviewArmando J.L. Pombeiro PART I - C-O BOND FORMATION. HYDROXYLATION AND OTHER OXYGENATION REACTIONS Chapter 2 Activation and oxidative functionalization of alkanes with noble-metal catalysts: Molecular mechanismsEvgeniy G. Chepaikin Chapter 3 Alkane-oxidizing systems based on metal complexes. Radical versus non-radical mechanismsGeorgiy B. Shul’pin Chapter 4 Reactions of alkyl radicals in aqueous solutionsDan meyerstein Chapter 5 C–H bond oxidation with transition metal based carbene complexesBruno Dominelli, Anja C. Lindhorst,Fritz E. Kühn Chapter 6 Alkane oxidation with C-scorpionate metal complexesLuísa M. D. R. S. Martins Chapter 7 Alkane oxidation with multinuclear heterometallic catalystsDmytro S. Nesterov, Oksana V. Nesterova and Armando J.L. Pombeiro Chapter 8 Oxidative functionalization of methane on heterogeneous catalystsMaricruz Sanchez-Sanchez and Johannes A. Lercher Chapter 9 Gas-phase oxidation of alkanesFabrizio Cavani, Alessandro Chieregato, Jose Manuel Lopez Nieto,Jean-Marc M. Millet PART II - BIOINSPIRED ALKANE FUNCTIONALIZATION Chapter 10 Recent developments of bio-inspired approaches to functionalization of light alkanesAlexander B. Sorokin Chapter 11 Regioselectivity of non-heme iron catalysts for C-H activationChristian R. Goldsmith Chapter 12 Imine-based Iron and Manganese Complexes as Catalysts for Alkane FunctionalizationGiorgio Olivo, Osvaldo Lanzalunga,Stefano Di Stefano Chapter 13 Alkane oxidation with biologically inspired nonheme iron catalysts based in the triazacyclononane ligand scaffold Miquel Costas Chapter 14 The nature of high-valent oxometal intermediates of iron-aminopyridine mediated oxidationsOleg Y. Lyakin, konstantin P. Bryliakov, Evgenii P. Talsi Chapter 15 Selective Oxidation of Alkanes by Metallo-Monooxygenases and their Nano-BiomimeticsChih-Cheng Liu,Yi-FangTtsai,Wondemagegn H. Wanna,Ravirala Ramu, Damodar Janmanchi, Sunney I. Chan,Steve S.-F. Yu Chapter 16 Alkane oxidation with vanadium and copper catalystsManas Sutradhar, Luísa M.D.R.S. Martins, M. Fátima C. Guedes da Silva, ArmandoJ. L. Pombeiro PART III – C-B, C-C AND C-N BOND FORMATION Chapter 17 Catalytic borylation of methane: combining computational and high-throughput screening approaches to discover a new catalystPavel Zatsepin, Dieter Sorsche, Seihwan Ahn,Mu-Hyun Baik, Daniel J. Mindiola Chapter 18 Alkane carbonylation and carbene insertion reactionsAna M. Faisca Phillips and Armando J. L. Pombeiro Chapter 19 Catalytic alkane amidation and related reactionsDmytro S. Nesterov, Luís M. T. Frija, Armando J. L. Pombeiro, Maximilian N. Kopylovich PART IV – DEHYDROGENATION REACTIONS Chapter 20 Oxidative and non-oxidative routes to alkane dehydrogenationJay A. Labinger Chapter 21 Dehydrogenation of alkanes using molecular catalystsHuaquan Fang, Guixia Liu, Zheng Huang PART V – UNCONVENTIONAL SYSTEMS Chapter 22 Non-transition metal catalyzed oxidation of alkanes with peroxidesMaxim L. Kuznetsov Chapter 23 Metal-free functionalization of alkanesJincan Zhao,Jianlin Han Chapter 24 Alkane functionalization under unconventional conditions: in ionic liquid, in supercritical co2 and microwave assistedAna P.C. Ribeiro,Eelisabete C.B.A. Alegria, António Palavra,Aarmando J.L. Pombeiro Chapter 25 Noncovalent interactions in alkane chemistryKamran T. Mahmudov,M. Fátima C. Guedes da Silva, Fedor I. Zubkov, Armando J. L. Pombeiro Chapter 26 Alkane complexationRobert H. Crabtree Chapter 27 Alkane related C-H bond activation and functionalization of aliphatic aminesChristian Bruneau, Mathieu Achard

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive compilation of the available experimental and theoretical vibrational data for organometallic compounds and its role in evaluating the structures, bonding, and properties of these key compounds This unique book offers a thorough review of the literature dealing with vibrational data obtained using various phases, including matrices, reported for organometallic compounds from infrared spectra, Raman spectra, and several other techniques. It is the only one that compiles the available experimental and theoretical vibrational data on these compounds, and which discusses the importance of this information and its role in evaluating structures, bonding, and other important properties. It also treats the use of DFT and other theoretical calculations to analyze the vibrational data and to predict properties associated with these compounds. The book also includes vibrational data for organic species that form on metal and other surfaces. Vibrational STable of ContentsPreface xi Part I Carbide, Alkylidyne, Alkylidene, Alkyl, and Alkane Compounds 1 1 Monocarbide Complexes 3 2 Terminal and Bridging Methylidyne (CH) and Other Alkylidyne Complexes 9 3 Terminal and Bridging Methylidene (CH2) and Other Alkylidene Complexes 13 4 Methyl Complexes 21 4.1 Neutral Monomeric Complexes 21 4.2 Cationic and Anionic Monomeric Complexes 29 4.3 Bridged Methyl Complexes 33 5 Methane and Other Alkane Complexes 37 6 Terminal and Bridged Ethyl Complexes 43 7 Propyl, Butyl, and Pentyl Complexes 49 8 Cycloalkyl and Cycloalkane Complexes 53 9 Saturated Heterometallacycle Complexes 55 10 Benzyl Complexes 59 11 Mixed Alkyl and Alkyl–Aryl Complexes 61 12 Surface Bound Alkyl, Alkane, and Alkyl–Metal Complexes 63 12.1 Metal Surfaces 63 12.2 Metalloid Surfaces 65 12.3 Inorganic Oxide Surfaces 66 13 Alkyl, Alkylidyne, and Alkylidene Complexes with Other Functional Groups 69 13.1 Hydrides 69 13.2 Halides and Mixed Halides and Hydrides 84 13.3 Pseudohalides 120 13.4 Carbonyl and Dinitrogen Complexes 135 13.5 Diazomethane (CH2N+=N−) and Related Complexes 139 13.6 Organic Isocyanides (Isonitriles, R‐N≡C), Organic Nitriles (R‐C≡N) and Iminoacyl Complexes 139 13.7 Carbon Dioxide and Carbon Disulfide Complexes 141 13.8 Aqua, Hydroxide, Oxide, Peroxide, and Oxyhalide Complexes 146 13.9 Hydrogen Sulfide, Mercaptide, Sulfide, and Disulfide Complexes 161 13.10 Alkoxide, Organoperoxide, Ether, and Alcohol Complexes 164 13.11 Alkylsulfide, Dialkylsulfide, and Methanethiol Complexes 171 13.12 Carboxylate, Thiocarboxylate, Dithiocarboxylate, and Xanthate Complexes 173 13.13 Formaldehyde, Formyl, Acetaldehyde, Acyl, and Related Complexes 180 13.14 Ketone, Ketenyl, and Related Complexes 187 13.15 β‐Diketonate and Related Complexes 190 13.16 Nitrogen Bases and Miscellaneous Lewis‐Base and Chelating Ligands 195 14 Complexes with Metal–Metal Bonds 215 14.1 Homonuclear Bonds 215 14.2 Heteronuclear Bonds 219 15 Halogenated Alkyl Complexes 225 15.1 Main Group Elements 225 15.2 Transition and Actinide Elements 234 Part I References 241 Part II Noncyclic Carbon-Clusters and Unsaturated Hydrocarbon Compounds 299 16 Linear Carbon Cluster Complexes 301 16.1 C2 Complexes 301 16.2 C3 Complexes 304 16.3 C4 Complexes 304 16.4 C5 and Larger Complexes 305 17 Ethynyl, Ethyne, and Related Complexes 309 17.1 Main Group Elements 309 17.2 d and f Block Elements 319 18 Vinyl and Vinylidene Complexes 343 19 Ethene and Related Monoalkene Complexes 355 20 Allyl and Related Complexes 371 21 Allene and Related Complexes 387 22 Conjugated and Nonconjugated Diolefin and Related Complexes 391 22.1 Butadiene and Butatriene Complexes 391 22.2 Pentadiene Complexes 396 22.3 Hexadiene Complexes 398 22.4 Miscellaneous Olefin Complexes 399 Part II References 403 Part III Cyclic, Unsaturated Organometallic Compounds 427 23 Metal Complexes of Fullerenes and Other Nonlinear Carbon Clusters 429 24 Three‐carbon Rings 433 25 Four‐carbon Rings 435 26 Five‐carbon Rings 441 26.1 Cyclopentene and Cyclopentyl Complexes 441 26.2 1,3‐Cyclopentadiene, Cyclopentadienone, and Related Complexes 441 26.3 Anionic Cyclopentadienide Complexes 443 26.4 Covalent Cyclopentadienyl Complexes 446 27 Six‐carbon Rings 547 27.1 Cyclohexene Complexes 547 27.2 Cyclohexadiene, Cyclohexadienyl, Oxocyclohexadienyl, and Quinone Complexes 547 27.3 Neutral, Cationic, and Anionic Phenyl Complexes 550 27.4 Phenyl Compounds with Other Functional Groups 559 27.5 Phenyl Complexes with Metal–Metal Bonds 585 27.6 Ring‐Substituted Phenyl Complexes 588 27.7 Perhalogenated Phenyl Complexes 591 27.8 Benzene Ring Complexes 596 27.9 Ring‐Substituted Benzene Complexes 608 27.10 Benzyne Complexes 611 28 Seven‐carbon Rings 613 29 Eight‐carbon Rings 615 30 Nine‐carbon Rings 629 31 Ten‐carbon Rings 631 32 Coupled Organic Ring Complexes 633 33 Fused Organic Ring Complexes 635 33.1 Pentalenyl Complexes 635 33.2 Indene and Indenyl Complexes 635 33.3 Fluorene and Fluorenyl Complexes 641 33.4 Indacenyl Complexes 641 33.5 Azulene Complexes 641 33.6 Naphthalene and Larger Fused Aromatic Ring Complexes 642 34 Miscellaneous Cyclic Olefin and Mixed Ring Complexes 643 35 Carboranes and Metallacarboranes 647 36 Five‐ and Six‐membered Heterocyclic Rings and Their Metal Complexes 651 37 Unsaturated Metallacycle Rings with Four or More Atoms 657 Part III References 661 Index 709

Read more less

Book SynopsisAcrucial overview of the cutting-edge in nanocarbon research and applications InSynthesis and Applications of Nanocarbons,the distinguished authors have set out to discussfundamental topics, synthetic approaches, materials challenges,and various applicationsof this rapidly developing technology.Nanocarbons haverecently emergedasa promising material for chemical, energy, environmental,and medical applicationsbecause oftheir unique chemical properties and their rich surface chemistries. This bookis the latestentry in the Wiley book seriesNanocarbon Chemistry and Interfacesand seeks to comprehensivelyaddress many of thenewly surfacingareas of controversy and development in the field. This book introduces foundational concepts in nanocarbon technology,hybrids, and applications, while also covering the most recent and cutting-edge developments in this area of study. Synthesis and Applications of Nanocarbonsaddresses new discoveries in the field, including: Nanodiamonds Onion-like carbons Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Properties of Carbon Bulk Materials: Graphite and Diamond 1Kamatchi Jothiramalingam Sankaran and Ken Haenen 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Graphite 2 1.2.1 History 2 1.2.2 sp2 Hybridization 3 1.2.3 Structure of Graphite 3 1.2.3.1 Hexagonal Graphite 3 1.2.3.2 Rhombohedral Graphite 3 1.2.3.3 Polycrystalline Graphite 4 1.2.3.4 Crystallite Imperfections 5 1.2.4 Natural and Synthetic Graphite 5 1.2.4.1 Natural Graphite 5 1.2.4.2 Synthetic Graphite 6 1.3 Diamond 7 1.3.1 History 7 1.3.2 sp3 Hybridization 8 1.3.3 Structure of Diamond 9 1.3.3.1 Crystal Forms of Diamond 9 1.3.4 Impurities in Diamond 10 1.3.4.1 Lattice Impurities 11 1.3.4.2 Inclusions 11 1.3.5 Natural and Synthetic Diamond 11 1.3.5.1 Natural Diamond 11 1.3.5.2 Synthetic Diamond 12 1.4 Characterization of Graphite and Diamond 14 1.4.1 Raman Spectroscopy 14 1.4.2 X-ray Diffraction 15 1.4.3 Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy 15 1.4.4 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 17 1.4.5 Scanning Electron Microscopy 17 1.4.6 Transmission Electron Microscopy 17 1.5 Properties of Graphite and Diamond 18 1.6 Applications of Graphite and Diamond 20 1.6.1 Graphite 20 1.6.2 Diamond 20 References 21 2 Endohedral and Exohedral Single-Layered Fullerenes 25Diana M. Bobrowska and Marta E. Plonska-Brzezinska 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Structure and Physicochemical Properties of “Empty” Single-Layered Fullerenes 25 2.3 Structure and Physicochemical Properties of Endohedral Fullerenes 29 2.4 Functionalization and Application of Single-Layered Fullerenes 32 2.4.1 Functionalization and Application of Exohedral Fullerenes 32 2.4.2 Functionalization and Application of Endohedral Metallofullerenes 38 2.5 Summary 42 Acknowledgments 42 References 42 3 Spherical Onion-Like Carbons 63Diana M. Bobrowska and Marta E. Plonska-Brzezinska 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Structure of Onion-Like Carbons and Their Physicochemical Properties 63 3.3 Covalent and Noncovalent Functionalization of OLCs 69 3.4 Doping of OLCs by Heteroatoms 82 3.5 Applications of OLCs 84 3.5.1 Bioimaging 84 3.5.2 (Bio)Sensors 85 3.5.3 Energy Storage Devices 86 3.5.4 Solar Cells 88 3.5.5 Electronic and Photonic Applications 88 3.5.6 Sorbents 89 3.5.7 Catalysis and Electrocatalysis 89 3.5.8 Tribology 90 3.6 Summary 90 Acknowledgments 91 References 91 4 Carbon Nanotubes: Synthesis, Properties, and New Developments in Research 107Marianna V. Kharlamova and Dominik Eder 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Atomic Structure of Carbon Nanotubes 108 4.3 Properties of Carbon Nanotubes 109 4.3.1 Electronic Properties 109 4.3.2 Mechanical Properties 110 4.3.3 Thermal Properties 111 4.4 Synthesis of Carbon Nanotubes 111 4.4.1 Arc-Discharge 111 4.4.2 Laser Ablation 112 4.4.3 Molten Salt Route/Electrolytic Process 113 4.4.4 Chemical Vapor Deposition 113 4.5 Postsynthesis Treatments of Carbon Nanotubes 114 4.5.1 Purification 114 4.5.2 Separation of Metallic and Semiconducting SWCNTs 115 4.5.3 Functionalization 116 4.6 New Developments in Carbon Nanotube Research: Toward Controllable Properties of Nanotubes 117 4.6.1 Chirality Selective Synthesis of SWCNTs 117 4.6.2 Chirality Selective Separation of SWCNTs 120 4.6.3 Substitutional Doping of SWCNTs 122 4.6.4 Exohedral Modification of CNTs: Nanotube Hybrids 123 4.6.5 Filling of SWCNT Interior Channels 124 4.7 Conclusions and Outlook 125 Acknowledgments 128 References 129 5 CNT Fiber-Based Hybrids: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications in Energy Management 149Moumita Rana, Cleis Santos, Alfonso Monreal-Bernal and Juan J. Vilatela 5.1 Introduction: What are CNT Fibers andWhy Do they Form Interesting Hybrids and Composites? 149 5.1.1 CNT Fiber Structure and Properties 149 5.1.2 Design Principles in CNT Fiber Hybrids 152 5.2 Hybridization with Metal Oxides 153 5.2.1 Surface Chemistry and Functionalization 154 5.2.2 Examples of Common Architectures: Layered, Particulates, Conformal 156 5.2.2.1 Particulate Systems 156 5.2.2.2 Layered Systems 161 5.2.2.3 Conformal CNT Fiber Hybrids 162 5.2.3 Hybrid Structure and Interfacial Characterization 163 5.2.3.1 Determination of Mass Fraction 163 5.2.3.2 Wetting and Interaction with Solvents 166 5.2.3.3 Specific Surface Area and Pore Size 168 5.2.4 Solid-State Transport Characterization of Layered Hybrids 169 5.2.4.1 Junction Characterization in Layered Hybrids 171 5.2.5 Interfacial Studies by Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy Methods 175 5.2.6 Advanced Interfacial Studies in ALD-Hybrid Test Systems 177 5.2.6.1 Residual Strain 177 5.2.6.2 Evidence of an Interfacial Ti—O—C Bond 179 5.2.6.3 Electronic Structure of the Ti—O—C Interface 180 5.3 EDLC Introducing Pseudocapacitive Reactions 182 5.4 Capacitive Deionization 185 5.5 Battery Electrodes 189 5.6 Conclusions and Perspective 193 References 194 6 Advanced Materials Designed with Nanodiamonds: Synthesis and Applications 201Jean-Charles Arnault 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Synthesis of Isolated Objects from ND 203 6.2.1 ND Grafted with Molecules 203 6.2.1.1 Electrostatic Grafting 203 6.2.1.2 Chemical Grafting 206 6.2.2 Nanodiamonds as Templates 209 6.2.2.1 Decoration by Atoms or Clusters 209 6.2.2.2 Core Shells with Diamond Core 212 6.3 Decoration of Particles by ND, Core Shells with Diamond Shell 215 6.3.1 Nanodiamonds to Decorate or to Graft to NP 215 6.3.1.1 Emulsion 215 6.3.1.2 Decoration of Nanoparticles with ND 216 6.3.1.3 Decoration of Carbon Nanostructures by ND 217 6.3.2 Silica/Diamond Core Shells 218 6.4 Conclusion and Perspectives 219 References 220 7 Chemical Functionalization of Nanodiamond for Nanobiomedicine 229Naoki Komatsu 7.1 Introduction 229 7.2 ND for Fluorescent Cell Labeling 229 7.2.1 Fluorophore-Immobilized ND 229 7.2.1.1 Synthesis 229 7.2.1.2 Cell Labeling 231 7.2.2 ND with Intrinsic Fluorescence 232 7.2.2.1 Synthesis 232 7.2.2.2 Cell Labeling 233 7.3 ND for MRI 235 7.3.1 Synthesis 235 7.3.2 MRI Relaxivity 238 7.4 ND for Gene Delivery 238 7.4.1 Synthesis 238 7.4.2 Gene Delivery 239 7.5 ND for Drug Delivery 241 7.5.1 Synthesis 241 7.5.2 Drug Delivery 243 7.6 Concluding Remarks 244 Acknowledgments 245 References 245 8 Nanocarbon Aerogels and Aerographite 247Hubert Beisch and Bodo Fiedler 8.1 Introduction 247 8.2 Fabrication 247 8.2.1 Non-template Based and Template Based Methods 248 8.2.1.1 Non-template Based Synthesis 248 8.2.1.2 Template Based Synthesis 249 8.2.2 Template Based Synthesis of Aerographite and Globugraphite 249 8.2.2.1 Fabrication of Porous Ceramic Templates 249 8.2.2.2 CVD Synthesis 250 8.3 Morphology 253 8.3.1 Tetrapodal Networks 253 8.3.2 Globular Foam Structures with Hierarchical Pore Morphology 254 8.3.3 ReticularMorphology 255 8.3.4 Carbon Hybrids 256 8.4 Properties 258 8.4.1 Density 258 8.4.2 Electrical and Electrochemical Properties 259 8.4.2.1 Electrical Conductivity 259 8.4.2.2 Electrochemical Performance 262 8.5 Modifications 267 8.5.1 Metal and Metal Oxide Hybrids 267 8.5.2 Thermal Treatment (Annealing) 267 8.6 Conclusion 270 8.6.1 Summary 270 8.6.2 Outlook 271 References 271 9 Optoelectronic Properties of Nanocarbons and Nanocarbon Films 275Cameron J. Shearer, LePing Yu and Joseph G. Shapter 9.1 Introduction 275 9.2 Nanocarbons 276 9.2.1 Graphene and Derivatives 276 9.2.1.1 Pristine Graphene via Micromechanical Exfoliation 276 9.2.1.2 Reduced Graphene/Graphite Oxide 278 9.2.1.3 Graphene from Chemical Vapor Deposition 278 9.2.2 Carbon Nanotubes 279 9.2.2.1 SWCNT Chirality 280 9.3 Fundamentals of Optical and Electronic Properties of Nanocarbons 280 9.3.1 Electronic Properties 280 9.3.1.1 Graphene 280 9.3.1.2 Carbon Nanotubes 282 9.3.2 Optical Properties 284 9.3.2.1 Graphene 284 9.3.2.2 Carbon Nanotubes 284 9.4 Optoelectronic Properties of Nanocarbon Films 287 9.4.1 The Figure of Merit (FOM) of Optoelectronic Devices 287 9.4.2 Techniques to Maximize FOM 287 9.5 Summary and Outlook 289 References 290 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines the concept of aging process facilities and infrastructure in high hazard industries and highlights options for dealing with the problem while addressing safety issues This book explores the many ways in which process facilities, equipment, and infrastructure might deteriorate upon continuous exposure to operating and climatic conditions. It covers the functional and physical failure modes for various categories of equipment and discusses the many warning signs of deterioration. Dealing with Aging Process Facilities and Infrastructure also explains how to deal with equipment that may not be safe to operate. The book describes a risk-based strategy in which plant leaders and supervisors can make more informed decisions on aging situations and then communicate them to upper management effectively. Additionally, it discusses the dismantling and safe removal of facilities that are approaching their intended lifecycle or have passed it altogether. Filled with numerous case studiTable of ContentsList of Tables xi List of Figures xiii Acknowledgments xv Preface 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Purpose 2 1.3 Aging: Concerns, Cause and Consequences 2 1.4 How Aging Occurs 6 1.4.1 Metallic Corrosion 7 1.4.2 Corrosion Under Deposits 8 1.4.3 Corrosion Under Insulation and Fireproofing 8 1.4.4 Manufacturing Defects 9 1.4.5 Excessive Wear and Tear 10 1.4.6 Fatigue 11 1.4.7 Non-Metallic Aging 12 1.4.8 Aging of Physical Structures 12 1.4.9 Process Chemicals Aging 13 1.4.10 Aging of Specialized Equipment 14 1.4.11 Obsolescence 14 1.4.12 Redundancy 15 1.4.13 Brownfield Construction 16 2. Aging Equipment Failures, Causes and Consequences 19 2.1 Aging Equipment Failure and Mechanisms 19 2.2 Consequences of Aging Equipment Incidents 20 2.3 Mechanical Failure of Metal 23 2.3.1 Deformation of Materials 23 2.3.2 Ductile vs. Brittle Fracture 24 2.3.3 Metal Fatigue 24 2.3.4 Corrosion/Erosion 25 2.3.5 Warning Signs 29 2.3.6 Aging Equipment Failure Case Studies 30 2.4 System Functional Aging 33 2.4.1 Aging Equipment Failure Mechanisms 34 2.5 Aging Structures 35 2.5.1 Warning Signs 36 2.5.2 Aging Structure Case Study 36 3. Plant Management Commitment and Responsibility 41 3.1 Promoting Site Safety Culture 41 3.2 Management Challenges 41 3.3 Monitoring Aging Process and Measuring Performance 42 3.4 Human Resources Requirements 44 3.5 Planning for Equipment Retirement and Replacement 45 3.6 Appreciating the Importance of Aging Infrastructure to the Business Enterprise 47 3.6.1 Structural Assets 47 3.6.2 Roads 47 3.6.3 Impoundments and Dikes 47 3.6.4 Fire Water, Cooling Water and Sewers 48 3.6.5 Electrical Distribution Systems 48 3.6.6 Marine Facilities 48 3.6.7 Other Process Facility Infrastructure 48 3.7 Addressing Aging Infrastructure in Decision Process 49 3.7.1 Questions Executives Need to Ask 49 3.7.2 Mergers and Acquisitions 50 4. Risk Based Decisions 51 4.1 Risk Management Basics 51 4.1.1 Risk Ranking 53 4.1.2 Risk Mitigation Controls 55 4.2 Risk Based Decisions 55 4.2.1 When to Apply Risk Based Decisions 57 4.3 How to Apply Risked Based Decisions 57 4.3.1 Determine Hazard Scenarios. 60 4.3.2 Assess Consequences 60 4.3.3 Assess Likelihood 61 4.3.4 Determine Risk 61 4.3.5 Develop Risk Mitigation Controls 62 4.3.6 Implement Risk Controls 63 4.3.7 Information Required for Risk Based Decisions 63 4.3.8 Documentation of Risk Based Decisions 64 4.4 Embracing Risk Based Management 65 4.4.1 Alignment of Management and Operations with Risk Based Decisions 65 4.4.2 Incorporate Corporate Responsibility and Economic Value 65 4.5 Dealing with Unexpected Events 66 4.6 Risk Based Decisions Success Metrics 67 5. Managing Process Equipment and Infrastructure Lifecycle 69 5.1 Lifecycle Stages 69 5.2 Asset Lifecycle Management 69 5.2.1 Management Strategy Development 70 5.2.2 Organizational Design 70 5.2.3 Long-Term Asset Planning 72 5.3 General Topics 72 5.3.1 Manage by Operational Integrity 72 5.3.2 Managing Change During Lifecycle 73 5.3.3 Orphaned Assets 76 5.3.4 Disrepair of Assets 76 5.3.5 Extending Lifecycle with Rebuilt Equipment 77 5.3.6 Managing Used or Refurbished Equipment 78 5.3.7 Mothballing and Re-commissioning of Aged Assets 79 5.3.8 Partial Upgrades to Older Facilities and Equipment 80 5.4 Predicting Asset Service Life 80 5.4.1 Mean Life and Age 80 5.4.2 Assessing End-of-Life Failure Probability 81 5.4.3 Aging Process and Maintenance 84 5.5 Infrastructure Specific Topics 85 6. Inspection and Maintenance Practices for Managing Life Cycle 87 6.1 Inspection and Maintenance Goals 88 6.1.1 Vision 88 6.1.2 Inspection and Maintenance Commitment for Expected Lifecycle of Equipment 88 6.1.3 Implementation of Formal Comprehensive Inspection, Testing and Preventive Maintenance Program 88 6.1.4 Need Justifiable Inspection and Maintenance Practices 89 6.1.5 Managing Aging Asset Strategies 89 6.2 Inspection and Maintenance Program Elements 91 6.2.1 Maintenance Program 94 6.2.2 Inspection Program 99 6.3 Inspection and Maintenance Program Resources 102 6.3.1 Human Resources 102 6.4 Addressing Infrastructure Deficiencies 104 6.4.1 Inspection Follow-up 105 7. Specific Aging Asset Integrity Management Practices 113 7.1 Structural Assets 113 7.1.1 Structure Foundations 113 7.1.2 Support Structures 116 7.1.3 Piping Systems, Pipe Racks and Overpass Information 119 7.1.4 Buildings 120 7.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance RAGAGEPs 123 7.2 Electrical Distribution and Controls 125 7.2.1 Electrical System 125 7.2.2 Control System 134 7.3 Earthworks: Roads, Impoundments, and Railways 137 7.3.1 Roads 137 7.3.2 Earthworks Infrastructure: Trenches, Dikes and Storage Ponds 139 7.3.3 Railways and Spurs 143 7.4 Marine Facilities: Terminals and Jetties 146 7.4.1 Marine Facilities Information 146 7.4.2 Marine Facility Inspection 148 7.4.3 Marine Facilities Aging Warning Signs 150 7.5 Underground Utility Systems 150 7.5.1 Electric Cables 151 7.5.2 Utility Underground Piping: Fuel Gas, Cooling Water, Fire Water, Drains and Sewers 153 8. Decommissioning, Dismantlement and Removal of Redundant Equipment 157 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Equipment Hazards 158 8.2.1 Unknown or Undocumented Condition 158 8.2.2 Dismantling Residual Chemical Hazards 158 8.2.3 Custody After Removal 160 8.3 Final Decommissioning Practices 160 8.3.1 Cleaning 160 8.3.2 Retaining Spare Equipment and Parts 161 8.3.3 Disposal of Chemicals 161 8.4 Dismantling and Disposal 162 8.4.1 Degassing 162 8.4.2 Inerting 162 8.4.3 Removal from Operating Facilities 163 8.4.4 Site Cleanup 163 8.4.5 Scrap Value 165 9. Onward and Beyond 167 Acronyms 169 References 173 Appendix A: Aging Asset Case Studies 177 Case Study 1: Gas Distribution Pipeline Explosion 177 Case Study 2: Mississippi Bridge Collapse 178 Case Study 3: Sinking Building Foundation 179 Case Study 4: Tailings Dam Failure 179 Case Study 5: Sinking of the Betelgeuse 180 Case Study 6: Alexander Kielland Drilling Rig Disaster 182 Case Study 7: Roof Collapse at Ore Processing Facility 182 Index 183

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest research on techniques for effective healing of chronic and difficult to heal wounds The healing of chronic wounds is a global medical concern, specifically for patients suffering from obesity and type II diabetes. Therapeutic Dressing and Wound Healing Applications is an essential text for research labs, industry professionals, and general clinical practitioners that want to make the shift towards advanced therapeutic dressing and groundbreaking wound application for better healing. This book takes a clinical and scientific approach to wound healing, and includes recent case studies to highlight key points and areas of improvement. It is divided into two key sections that include insight into the biochemical basis of wounds, as well as techniques and recent advancements. Chapters include information on: ? Debridement and disinfection properties of wound dressing ? Biofilms, silver nanoparticles, and honey dressings ? Clinical perspectives for treating diabetic wounds ? TTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Series Preface xvii Preface xix 1 Chronic Wound Healing: Molecular and Biochemical Basis 1Sophia Tate and Keith Harding 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Acute Wound Healing 1 1.3 Categories of Chronic Wound 3 1.3.1 Pressure Ulcers 3 1.3.2 Venous Stasis Ulcers 4 1.3.3 Ischaemic Ulcers 4 1.3.4 Diabetic Foot Ulcers 4 1.4 How a Chronic Wound Develops: Intrinsic Components 4 1.4.1 Cell Phenotype 5 1.4.2 Immune Cells and Inflammatory Mediators 6 1.4.3 Reactive Oxygen Species 8 1.4.4 Growth Factors 8 1.4.5 The Role of Matrix Metalloproteinases 12 1.5 How a Chronic Wound Develops: Extrinsic Factors 13 1.5.1 Infection 13 1.5.2 Nutrition 13 1.5.3 Tobacco Smoking 14 1.5.4 Hypoxia and Ischaemia–Reperfusion Injury 15 1.6 Concluding Remarks 15 References 16 2 Clinical Perspectives for Treating Chronic Wounds 21Barun Majumder, Kirstie Lane, Diane Beck, Sandeep Singh and Duniya Majumder 2.1 Background 21 2.2 Aetiology of Diabetic Foot Ulcers 22 2.3 Standard of Care for Treatment of Diabetic Foot Ulcers 22 2.4 Commonly Used Wound Dressings for Diabetic Foot Ulcers and Their Mechanism of Action 22 2.5 Absorbent and Superabsorbent Dressings 23 2.6 Alginates 23 2.7 Films 23 2.8 Foams 24 2.9 Honeys 24 2.10 Hydrogels 25 2.11 The Role of a Split Thickness Skin Graft in Diabetic Foot Ulcers 25 2.12 Negative Pressure Wound Therapy 25 2.13 Larval Therapy 27 2.14 Clinical Case Studies from Multidisciplinary Diabetic Foot Clinic 27 2.14.1 Neuropathic Wound 27 2.14.2 Ischaemic Wound 29 2.14.3 Neuro-Ischaemic Wound 31 2.14.4 Osteomyelitis 33 2.14.5 Charcot’s Foot 35 2.14.6 Necrotising Fasciitis in a Patient with Diabetes 36 2.15 Summary 39 Acknowledgements 39 References 39 3 Prediction, Prevention, Assessment, and Management of Skin Tears in the Aging Population 43Kimberly LeBlanc and Karen Campbell 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Skin Tear Prevalence and Incidence 44 3.3 Predicting Skin Tears 45 3.4 Prevention 47 3.5 ISTAP Risk Reduction Program 49 3.5.1 General Health 49 3.5.2 Mobility 50 3.5.3 Skin 51 3.6 Assessment 52 3.7 Management 54 3.8 Treatment 54 3.9 Conclusion 55 References 55 4 Importance of Debriding and Wound Cleansing Agents in Wound Healing 59Gwendolyn Cazander, Bianca K. den Ottelander, Sandra Kamga, Martijn C.H.A. Doomen, Tim H.C. Damen and Anne Marie E. van Well 4.1 What is Debridement? 59 4.2 The History of Debridement 59 4.3 Why Undertake Debridement? 60 4.4 Debridement Techniques and Wound Cleansing Agents 62 4.4.1 Mechanical Debridement 62 4.4.2 Biological Debridement 72 4.4.3 Enzymatic Debridement 74 4.4.4 Autolytic Debridement 77 4.4.5 Wound Cleansing 79 4.4.6 Other Debridement Therapies 80 4.5 What is the Future of Debridement? 81 References 82 5 Treatment of Mixed Infections in Wounds 91Asif Ahmed and Joshua Boateng 5.1 Introduction 91 5.1.1 Wound Healing Process 92 5.1.2 Types of Chronic Wounds 92 5.2 Prevalence of Mixed Infections 94 5.2.1 Bacterial–Fungal Interactions 95 5.2.2 Bacterial–Bacterial Interactions 98 5.2.3 Host Responses to Mixed Infections and Drug Resistance 99 5.3 Management of Mixed Infected Wounds 100 5.3.1 Clinical and Microbiological Diagnosis 101 5.3.2 Debridement and Cleansing 101 5.3.3 Antimicrobial Therapies 102 5.3.4 Hyperbaric Oxygen Therapy 104 5.3.5 Phage Therapy 104 5.4 Summary and Future Perspectives 104 References 105 6 Treatment of Biofilms in Infected Wounds 115Philip Debrah, Awo Afi Kwapong and Mansa Fredua-Agyeman 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Why and How Biofilms Form 116 6.3 Wound Biofilms 118 6.3.1 Wound Healing 119 6.4 Biofilms and Wounds 119 6.4.1 Simulation of Biofilms in Wounds 120 6.5 Treatment of Biofilms in Wounds 126 6.5.1 Biofilm Eradication 126 6.5.2 Current Treatment Protocols 128 6.6 Clinical Examples 128 6.7 Summary 128 References 130 7 Freeze-Dried Wafers for Wound Healing 137Shiow-Fern Ng 7.1 Introduction 137 7.2 Wafer as a Modern Wound Dressing 138 7.3 Freeze-Drying Process 139 7.4 Wafer Preparation 140 7.5 Wafer Assessments 141 7.5.1 Morphology 142 7.5.2 Swelling Index 144 7.5.3 Mechanical Properties 145 7.5.4 In Vitro Drug Release 145 7.5.5 Cell Viability 146 7.6 Wafer Biopolymers 146 7.6.1 Alginate 147 7.6.2 Chitosan 148 7.6.3 Carboxymethylcellulose 149 7.7 Conclusion 150 References 150 8 Silver and Silver Nanoparticle-Based Antimicrobial Dressings 157Joshua Boateng and Ovidio Catanzano 8.1 Introduction 157 8.1.1 Brief History of Silver as an Antibiotic 159 8.1.2 Mechanism of Action 160 8.1.3 Bacterial Resistance to Silver 164 8.2 Silver Dressings in Wound Healing 167 8.2.1 Silver-Based Antimicrobial Dressings 169 8.2.2 Silver Nanoparticle-Based Antimicrobial Dressings 170 8.3 Cost-Effectiveness of Silver Dressings 175 8.4 Concluding Remarks 176 References 177 9 Hydrogel Dressings 185Galiya S. Irmukhametova, Grigoriy A. Mun and Vitaliy V. Khutoryanskiy 9.1 Introduction 185 9.1.1 Classification by Origin of Materials Used to Prepare Hydrogels 186 9.1.2 Classification by Composition and Structure of Hydrogels 186 9.1.3 Classification by the Type of Cross-Linking 187 9.1.4 Classification Based on the Shape and Dimensions of Hydrogels 187 9.1.5 Classification Based on the Charge of Macromolecules Forming Hydrogels 187 9.1.6 Classification Based on Functional Properties of the Hydrogels 187 9.2 Mechanism of Hydrogel Swelling 187 9.2.1 Swelling of Temperature-Sensitive Hydrogels and Their Application in Wound Healing 189 9.2.2 Swelling of Light-Sensitive Hydrogels 190 9.2.3 Swelling of Electro-Sensitive Hydrogels 191 9.3 Application of Hydrogels as Wound Dressings 191 9.4 Industrial Methods for the Synthesis of Hydrogels for Wound Dressings 193 9.4.1 Polymerization Methods 193 9.4.2 Cross-Linking of Polymers 195 9.5 Antimicrobial Hydrogels with Special Additives 198 9.6 Conclusion 200 Acknowledgments 201 References 201 10 Gene Therapy for the Treatment of Chronic Wounds 209Marcos Garcia-Fuentes 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Pharmacodynamics of Gene Therapy in Chronic Wounds 210 10.2.1 Signalling Supplementation 210 10.2.2 Pathway Inhibition 211 10.3 Administration Routes and Methods 212 10.3.1 Systemic Delivery 212 10.3.2 Topical Delivery 212 10.3.3 Intralesional Delivery 213 10.4 Gene Delivery Systems 213 10.4.1 Physical Methods 214 10.4.2 Viral Vectors 215 10.4.3 Chemical Delivery Systems 217 10.4.4 Gene-Activated Matrices 220 10.5 Clinical Evaluation 221 10.6 Conclusion 226 Acknowledgements 226 References 227 11 Honey in Wound Healing 235Emi Maruhashi 11.1 The History of Honey 235 11.2 Composition 236 11.3 Honey Research 236 11.4 Medical Grade Honey 237 11.5 Modes of Action 238 11.6 Applications and Specific Wound Types 242 11.7 Practical Considerations 246 11.8 Novel Concepts and Conclusions 247 References 248 12 Regeneration Using Tissue Engineered Skin Strategies 255Lucília P. da Silva, Mariana T. Cerqueira and Alexandra P. Marques 12.1 Introduction 255 12.2 Skin Physiology and Wounding 256 12.3 Skin Tissue Engineering 258 12.4 Evolving Skin Tissue Engineering Strategies 259 12.4.1 Balancing the Inflammatory Phase 261 12.4.2 Enhancement of Re-Epithelialization 263 12.4.3 Target of Dermal Matrix Synthesis and Remodeling 269 12.4.4 Re-Establishment of the Vascular Network 270 12.4.5 Innervation Shaping 280 12.4.6 Appendages and Pigmentation 281 12.5 Conclusion 282 References 283 13 Local Delivery of Growth Factors Using Wound Dressings 291Ovidio Catanzano and Joshua Boateng 13.1 Wound Dressings as Delivery Platforms for Growth Factors 291 13.2 Growth Factors Involved in the Wound Healing Process 292 13.3 Local Delivery of Growth Factors Using Wound Dressings 296 13.4 Integration of Platelet-Rich Plasma in Wound Dressings 299 13.5 Enhancing Local Growth Factor Expression Using Gene Therapy 300 13.6 Wound Delivery of Growth Factors from Living Systems 302 13.7 Regulatory Considerations 305 13.8 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 306 References 307 14 Electrospinning Technologies in Wound Dressing Applications 315Giuseppina Sandri, Silvia Rossi, Maria Cristina Bonferoni, Carla Caramella and Franca Ferrari 14.1 Introduction 315 14.2 Basic Concept and Electrospinning Set-Up 316 14.3 Parameters Affecting the Electrospinning Process 318 14.4 Process Parameters 319 14.4.1 Electric Field Strength 319 14.4.2 Flow Rate 319 14.4.3 Needle-to-Collector Distance 320 14.4.4 Collector and Needle Types 320 14.5 Solution Parameters 321 14.5.1 Molecular Weight and Polymer Concentration 321 14.5.2 Surface Tension 322 14.5.3 Conductivity/Surface Charge Density 322 14.5.4 Environmental Parameters 322 14.6 Biomedical Applications of Nanofibrous Membranes 323 14.6.1 Wound Dressings and Wound Healing 323 14.6.2 Electrospun Dressings 325 14.7 Chemicophysical and Biopharmaceutical Characterizations 325 14.8 Dressing/Scaffold Parameters Affecting Cell Functions 327 14.9 Materials for Fabricating Nanofibers 328 14.9.1 Biopolymers 328 14.10 Concluding Remarks 333 References 333 15 The Place of Biomaterials in Wound Healing 337Annalisa Bianchera, Ovidio Catanzano, Joshua Boateng and Lisa Elviri 15.1 Introduction to Biomaterials for Wound Healing 337 15.1.1 Definition of Biomaterials 337 15.1.2 Functional Requirements of Wound Repair Biomaterials 338 15.1.3 Classification of Biomaterials Commonly Used in Wound Healing 338 15.2 Synthetic Biomaterials for Wound Healing 339 15.2.1 Polyurethanes and their Derivatives 340 15.2.2 Poly l-Lactic Acid 340 15.2.3 Poly(Ethylene Glycol) 341 15.2.4 Polycaprolactone 341 15.2.5 Poly(Glycolic Acid) and Poly(Lactic-co-Glycolic Acid) 342 15.3 Natural Biomaterials for Wound Healing 343 15.3.1 Polysaccharide-Based Biomaterials 343 15.3.2 Protein-Based Biomaterials 348 15.4 Application of Biomaterials in Wound Healing 350 15.4.1 Traditional and Impregnated Dressings 350 15.4.2 Hydrogels 352 15.4.3 Film Dressings 353 15.4.4 Foam Dressings 354 15.4.5 Nanofiber-Based Dressings 355 15.4.6 Three-Dimensional Printed Dressings 356 15.5 New Trends in Biomaterials for Wound Healing 357 15.5.1 Extracellular Matrix-Derived Biomaterials 357 15.5.2 Tissue Engineered Skin Substitutes 357 15.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 358 References 359 16 Wound Dressings and Pressure Ulcers 367Michael Clark 16.1 Overview 367 16.2 Introduction to Pressure Ulcers 367 16.3 The Impact of Pressure Ulcers 369 16.4 Managing Pressure Ulcers 370 16.5 Wound Dressings in Pressure Ulcer Treatment 371 16.6 Pressure Ulcer Prevention and Wound Dressings 377 16.6.1 Pressure Ulcers at the Nose 378 16.6.2 Pressure Ulcers at the Heel 378 16.6.3 Pressure Ulcers at the Sacrum 378 16.7 Conclusions 380 References 380 17 3D Printed Scaffolds for Wound Healing and Tissue Regeneration 385Atabak Ghanizadeh Tabriz, Dennis Douroumis and Joshua Boateng 17.1 Introduction 385 17.2 3D Printing 386 17.3 Laser-Based Bioprinting 387 17.4 Jet-Based Printing 389 17.5 Extrusion-Based Printing 391 17.6 Hybrid Printing 393 17.7 Conclusions 395 References 395 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddresses Dynamic Nuclear Polarization (DNP) as a technique for sensitivity-enhancement in solid-state NMR spectroscopy This comprehensive handbook is a compendium of the current state-of-the art of high field Dynamic Nuclear Polarizationfrom long-proven, early developments, up to today's hot topics. It covers all the relevant subjects that have made a direct or indirect contribution toward advancing this field, and focuses on topics such as: the theory behind the effects seen within DNP; instrumentation required for carrying out DNP; and specific applications of DNP including protein monitoring, catalysis, nanoparticles, biological and clinical studies. Development and application of techniques that have indirectly contributed to advancing MAS DNP NMR, such as DNP experiments on static solids within microwave resonant structures, and high-field EPR, are also examined. Handbook of High Field Dynamic Nuclear Polarization is presented in three sectionsTheoretical Aspects, DNP DevelopmTable of ContentsContributors xi Series Preface xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi Part A: Concepts, Theory, & Instrumentation 1 1 The Discovery and Demonstration of Dynamic Nuclear Polarization–A Personal and Historical Account 3Charles P. Slichter 2 DNP Mechanisms 15Krishnendu Kundu, Frédéric Mentink-Vigier, Akiva Feintuch, and Shimon Vega 3 Pulsed Dynamic Nuclear Polarization 71Kong Ooi Tan, Sudheer Jawla, Richard J. Temkin, and Robert G. Griffin 4 MAS-DNP Enhancements: Hyperpolarization, Depolarization, and Absolute Sensitivity 87Sabine Hediger, Daniel Lee, Frédéric Mentink-Vigier, and Gaël De Paëpe 5 Polarizing Agents: Evolution and Outlook in Free Radical Development for DNP 103Gilles Casano, Hakim Karoui, and Olivier Ouari 6 Paramagnetic Metal Ions for Dynamic Nuclear Polarization 121Björn Corzilius 7 Instrumentation for High-field Dynamic Nuclear Polarization NMR Spectroscopy 143Guy M. Bernard and Vladimir K. Michaelis 8 Millimeter-wave Sources for DNP-NMR 155Monica Blank and Kevin L. Felch 9 Cryogenic Platforms and Optimized DNP Sensitivity 169Yoh Matsuki and Toshimichi Fujiwara 10 Versatile Dynamic Nuclear Polarization Hardware with Integrated Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Capabilities 189Alisa Leavesley, Ilia Kaminker, and Songi Han 11 Dissolution Dynamic Nuclear Polarization Methodology and Instrumentation 219Dennis Kurzbach and Sami Jannin 12 Introduction to Dissolution DNP: Overview, Instrumentation, and Human Applications 239Jan H. Ardenkjaer-Larsen 13 Liquid-state Overhauser DNP at High Magnetic Fields 261Vasyl P. Denysenkov and Thomas F. Prisner 14 Overhauser DNP in Liquids on 13C Nuclei 279Marina Bennati and Tomas Orlando Part B: Applications 289 15 DNP and Cellular Solid-state NMR 291Alessandra Lucini Paioni, Marie A.M. Renault, and Marc Baldus 16 Cryo-trapped Intermediates of Retinal Proteins Studied by DNP-enhanced MAS NMR Spectroscopy 305Johanna Becker-Baldus and Clemens Glaubitz 17 DNP Solid-state NMR of Biological Membranes 323Burkhard Bechinger 18 DNP in Materials Science: Touching the Surface 337Pierrick Berruyer, Lyndon Emsley, and Anne Lesage 19 Growing Signals from the Noise: Challenging Nuclei in Materials DNP 353Frédéric A. Perras, Takeshi Kobayashi, and Marek Pruski 20 DNP-enhanced Solid-state NMR Spectroscopy of Active Pharmaceutical Ingredients 373Li Zhao, Arthur C. Pinon, Lyndon Emsley, and Aaron J. Rossini 21 In Vivo Hyperpolarized 13C MRS and MRI Applications 405Irene Marco-Rius and Arnaud Comment 22 Dissolution Dynamic Nuclear Polarization 421Walter Köckenberger Index 435

Read more less

Book SynopsisA wide-ranging exploration of the science and practice of food frying Frying is one of the world's most popular methods of food preparation. Whether using oils or fats, it is valued for the particular flavors and textures it can bring, and represents a multibillion-dollar sector of the global economy. Food Frying: Chemistry, Biochemistry and Safety explores this important cooking technique in its scientific dimensions, charting the relationships between the chemical reactions produced during frying, the changes in food quality that these engender, and associated digestive and health-related issues. By outlining these connections, the author provides an aid to a safer, healthier approach to food frying. Topics covered range from culturally specific forms of frying to detailed analyses of the chemical and biochemical processes involved in its practice. Delivering these insights in a practical and easy-to-follow manner, this unique text includes: <Table of ContentsForeword by Bertrand Matthäus xvii Preface xix About the Author xxi Acknowledgement xxiii Part I Concept of Food Frying 1 1 Food Frying: The Concept 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 History of Frying 3 1.3 Mechanism of Frying 5 1.4 Why We Fry Foods 17 1.5 Key Concepts 18 References 18 2 Frying Techniques 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Concept of Deep Frying 23 2.3 Tools Used in Frying 24 2.4 Optimized Conditions 26 2.5 Types of Frying 36 2.6 Tips to Remember During Frying 53 2.7 Choice of Frying Method 54 2.8 Key Concepts 55 References 56 3 Frying and Culture 65 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 The Common Point 65 3.3 Frying in American Cuisines 66 3.4 Frying in European Cuisines 67 3.5 Frying in Asian Cuisines 68 3.6 Frying in African Cuisines 68 3.7 Frying in Middle Eastern Cuisines 69 3.8 Key Concepts 69 References 70 Part II Chemistry of Food Frying 71 4 Chemistry of the Frying Medium 73 4.1 Frying Medium 73 4.2 Classification and Choice of Frying Medium 74 4.3 Chemistry of the Frying Medium 75 4.4 Chemistry of Lipid Oxidation During Frying 85 4.5 Formation of Volatile Products 96 4.6 Sterol Oxidation 103 4.7 Tocopherol Oxidation 104 4.8 Formation of Trans Fatty Acids 107 4.9 Techniques for Measuring Lipid Oxidation 108 4.10 Key Concepts 109 References 109 5 Chemistry of Fried Foods 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Carbohydrates 115 5.3 Proteins and Amino Acids 119 5.4 Lipids 121 5.5 Micromolecules 122 5.6 Frying of Carbohydrate‐Rich Foods 122 5.7 Frying of Protein‐Rich Foods 133 5.8 Frying of Seafood 143 5.9 Frying of Vegetables 150 5.10 Physicochemical Characteristics of Fried Foods 158 5.11 Improving Product Quality 164 5.12 Key Concepts 164 References 165 6 Chemistry of Interactions in Frying 175 6.1 Introduction 175 6.2 Factors Affecting the Frying Medium 176 6.3 Factors Affecting the Food 184 6.4 Heat Transfer 195 6.5 Mass Transfer 195 6.6 Nutritional Value Retention 196 6.7 Key Concepts 200 References 200 7 Analysis of Frying 207 7.1 Introduction 207 7.2 Analysis of Triacylglycerols 208 7.3 Analysis of FA Oxidation Products 225 7.4 Analysis of Sterol Oxidation 236 7.5 Analysis of Sensory Metabolites 245 7.6 Analysis of Heterocyclic Amines 249 7.7 Analysis of Acrylamide 250 7.8 Analysis of Tocopherols 251 7.9 Analysis of Polyphenolic Compounds 255 7.10 Analysis of Other Minor Compounds 255 7.11 Key Concepts 256 References 257 Part III Biochemistry of Food Frying 277 8 Digestion and Absorption of Fried Foods 279 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Acceptability of Fried Foods 279 8.3 Digestion of Fried Foods 282 8.4 Absorption of Fried Foods 285 8.5 Excretion of Fried Foods 287 8.6 Key Concepts 289 References 289 9 Nutrition and Metabolism of Fried Foods 293 9.1 Introduction 293 9.2 Metabolism of Fried Lipids 295 9.3 Metabolism of Fried Proteins 309 9.4 Metabolism of Fried Carbohydrates 312 9.5 Metabolism of Other Metabolites 316 9.6 Key Concepts 316 References 318 10 Fried Foods in Health and Disease 327 10.1 Introduction 327 10.2 Fried Foods and Health 327 10.3 Fried Foods and Cancer 330 10.4 Fried Foods and Diabetes 333 10.5 Fried Foods and Cardiovascular Diseases 336 10.6 Fried Foods and Aging 339 10.7 Key Concepts 340 References 340 Part IV Safety in Food Frying 347 11 Safety Assessment of Food Frying 349 11.1 Introduction 349 11.2 Guideline for Assessment 350 11.3 Quality Indicators for Used Frying Oils 351 11.4 Physical Assessment 353 11.5 Chemical Assessment 355 11.6 Evaluation of Fried Foods 359 11.7 The Future of Fried Food Safety 359 11.8 Key Concepts 360 References 360 12 Toxicity of Food Frying 365 12.1 Introduction 365 12.2 Toxicity of Oxidized Triacylglycerols 365 12.3 Toxicity of Acrylamide 366 12.4 Toxicity of Acrolein 368 12.5 Toxicity of Amines and Alcohols 375 12.6 Toxicity of Aldehydes 385 12.7 Pro‐Oxidants 391 12.8 Disposal of Fried Foods 391 12.9 Disposal and Use of the Frying Medium 393 12.10 Key Concepts 395 References 396 13 Improving the Quality of Fried Foods 407 13.1 Introduction 407 13.2 Improving the Quality of Fried Foods 407 13.3 Mitigation Strategies for Acrylamide 424 13.4 Reducing Oil Uptake 427 13.5 Fortification 428 13.6 The Role of Natural Antioxidants 428 13.7 Packaging of Fried Foods 431 13.8 Quality Control in Frying 434 13.9 Key Concepts 434 References 434 14 The Future of Food Frying 447 14.1 Introduction 447 14.2 Current Strategies 447 14.3 Future Scenarios 449 14.4 Hurdles 451 14.5 Key Concepts 452 References 452 Index 455

Read more less

Book SynopsisA new edition of this practical approach to sampling, experimentation, and applications in the field of inductively coupled plasma spectrometry The second edition of Practical Inductively Coupled Plasma Spectrometry discusses many of the significant developments in the field which have expanded inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectrometry from a useful optical emission spectroscopic technique for trace element analysis into a source for both atomic emission spectrometry and mass spectrometry, capable of detecting elements at sub-ppb (ng mL-1) levels with good accuracy and precision. Comprising nine chapters, this new edition has been fully revised and up-dated in each chapter. It contains information on everything you need to practically know about the different types of instrumentation as well as pre- and post-experimental aspects. Designed to be easily accessible, with a start-to-finish' approach, each chapter outlines the key practical aspeTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xix Acronyms, Abbreviations and Symbols xxiii 1 The Analytical Approach 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Essentials of Practical Work 2 1.3 Health and Safety 3 1.4 SI Units and Their Use 4 1.5 Significant Figures 11 1.6 Calibration and Quantitative Analysis 12 1.7 Making Notes of Practical Work and Observations 13 1.8 Data Analysis 14 1.9 Data Treatment 17 1.10 Data Quality 18 1.11 Data Interpretation and Context 21 1.12 Analytical Terms and Their Definitions 21 1.13 Summary 26 2 Sampling and Storage 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Sampling Soil 28 2.3 Sampling Water 31 2.4 Sampling Air 32 2.5 Sample Storage 34 2.6 Sample Preservation 36 2.7 Summary 37 3 Sample Preparation 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Aqueous Samples 40 3.2.1 Liquid–Liquid Extraction 40 3.2.1.1 Procedure for APDC Extraction in to MIBK 42 3.2.2 Ion Exchange 42 3.2.2.1 Procedure for Batch Ion Exchange Extraction 43 3.3 Solid Samples 43 3.3.1 Decomposition Techniques 45 3.3.1.1 Procedure for Acid Digestion A 46 3.3.1.2 Procedure for Acid Digestion B 46 3.3.1.3 Procedure for Microwave Acid Digestion 49 3.3.2 Alternate Decomposition Techniques 49 3.3.2.1 Procedure for Dry Ashing 49 3.3.2.2 Procedure for Fusion 50 3.4 Extraction Procedures 51 3.4.1 Procedure for Extractable Mercury from Soil and Sediment 52 3.4.2 Procedure for Speciation of Extractable Mercury from Soil and Sediment 52 3.4.3 Procedure for Arsenic Species Extraction 52 3.4.4 Single Extraction Methods 57 3.4.4.1 Procedure for EDTA Extraction 57 3.4.4.2 Procedure for AA Extraction 58 3.4.4.3 Procedure for Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic Acid (DTPA) Extraction 58 3.4.4.4 Procedure for Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) Extraction 58 3.4.4.5 Procedure for Ammonium Nitrate (NH4NO3) Extraction 59 3.4.4.6 Procedure for Sodium Nitrate (NaNO3) Extraction 60 3.4.5 Sequential Extraction 60 3.4.5.1 Procedure for Stage 1 Extraction 62 3.4.5.2 Procedure for Stage 2 Extraction 62 3.4.5.3 Procedure for Stage 3 Extraction 63 3.4.6 CISED 63 3.4.6.1 Procedure for CISED 64 3.4.7 In Vitro Gastrointestinal Extraction Method 65 3.4.7.1 Procedure for Gastric Extraction 66 3.4.7.2 Procedure for Gastric + Intestinal Extraction 67 3.4.8 In Vitro Simulated Epithelium Lung Fluid Method 67 3.4.8.1 Procedure for Inhalation Bioaccessibility Extraction 69 3.5 Summary 69 Reference 69 3.A Extraction Reagents for Single Extraction Methods 70 3.A.1 Preparation of EDTA, 50 mM 70 3.A.2 Preparation of AA, 0.43 M 70 3.A.3 Preparation of Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic Acid (DTPA), 5 mM 70 3.A.4 Preparation of Ammonium Nitrate (NH4NO3), 1 M 70 3.A.5 Preparation of Calcium Chloride (CaCl2), 0.01 M 70 3.A.6 Preparation of Sodium Nitrate (NaNO3), 0.1 M 71 3.B Extraction Reagents for the Sequential Extraction Method 71 3.B.1 Preparation of Solution A (Acetic Acid, 0.11 M) 71 3.B.2 Preparation of Solution B (Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride or Hydroxyammonium Chloride, 0.5 M) 71 3.B.3 Preparation of Solution C (Hydrogen Peroxide [300 mg g−1], 8.8 M) 71 3.B.4 Preparation of Solution D (Ammonium Acetate, 1 M) 71 3.C Extraction Reagents for the Unified Bioaccessibility Method 72 3.C.1 Preparation of Simulated Saliva Fluid 72 3.C.2 Preparation of Simulated Gastric Fluid 72 3.C.3 Preparation of Simulated Duodenal Fluid 72 3.C.4 Preparation of Simulated Bile Fluid 73 3.D Extraction Reagents for the In Vitro SELF 73 3.D.1 Preparation of SELF 73 4 Sample Introduction 75 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Nebulizers 76 4.3 Spray Chambers and Desolvation Systems 79 4.4 Discrete Sample Introduction 83 4.5 Continuous Sample Introduction 87 4.6 Hydride and Cold‐Vapour Generation Techniques 91 4.7 Summary 93 References 93 5 The Inductively Coupled Plasma 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Radiofrequency Generators 96 5.3 Inductively Coupled Plasma Formation and Operation 96 5.4 Processes Within the ICP 106 5.5 Signal Processing and Instrument Control 106 5.6 Summary 107 References 108 6 Inductively Coupled Plasma–Atomic Emission Spectrometry 109 6.1 Introduction 110 6.2 Fundamentals of Spectroscopy 110 6.2.1 Origins of Atomic Spectra 111 6.2.2 Spectral Line Intensity 113 6.2.3 Spectral Line Broadening 114 6.3 Plasma Spectroscopy 116 6.4 Spectrometers 118 6.4.1 Sequential Spectrometer 122 6.4.2 Simultaneous Spectrometers 122 6.5 Detectors 125 6.5.1 Photomultiplier Tube 127 6.5.2 Charge‐Transfer Devices 128 6.6 Interferences 130 6.7 Summary 131 References 132 7 Inductively Coupled Plasma–Mass Spectrometry 133 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Fundamentals of Mass Spectrometry 134 7.2.1 Some Terminology 134 7.3 Inorganic Mass Spectrometry 135 7.3.1 The Ion Source: ICP 137 7.3.2 The Interface 138 7.4 Mass Spectrometers 139 7.4.1 Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer 140 7.4.2 High‐Resolution Mass Spectrometers 142 7.4.3 Ion‐Trap Mass Spectrometer 150 7.4.4 Time‐of‐Flight Mass Spectrometer 152 7.5 Detectors 153 7.6 Interferences 156 7.6.1 Isobaric Interferences 156 7.6.2 Molecular Interferences 158 7.6.3 Remedies for Molecular Interferences 161 7.6.3.1 Charge Transfer 161 7.6.3.2 Proton Transfer 162 7.6.3.3 Hydrogen‐Atom Transfer 162 7.6.3.4 Atom Transfer 162 7.6.3.5 Adduct Formation 162 7.6.4 Non‐Spectral Interferences: Matrix‐Induced 164 7.7 Isotope Dilution Analysis 165 7.8 Summary 176 References 176 8 Inductively Coupled Plasma: Current and Future Developments 177 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Comparison of ICP–AES and ICP–MS 177 8.3 Applications 182 8.4 Current and Future Developments 183 8.4.1 In General, for the ICP 184 8.4.2 For ICP–MS 185 8.4.3 For ICP–AES 189 8.5 Useful Resources 191 References 198 Further Reading 198 9 Inductively Coupled Plasma: Troubleshooting and Maintenance 201 9.1 Introduction 201 9.2 Diagnostic Issues 201 9.3 Tips to Reduce… 202 9.3.1 Potential Autosampler Issues 202 9.3.2 Contamination 202 9.4 Tips to Improve… 203 9.4.1 Sample Preparation 203 9.5 How To … 203 9.5.1 Unblock a Blocked Pneumatic Concentric Nebulizer 203 9.5.2 Clean the Spray Chamber 203 9.5.3 Clean the Plasma Torch 204 9.6 What to do About… 204 9.6.1 Plasma Ignition Problems 204 9.7 Shut Down Procedure (At the End of the Day) 204 9.8 Regular Maintenance Schedule 205 The Periodic Table 207 SI Units and Physical Constants 209 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn the fundamentals of materials design with this all-inclusive approach to the basics in the field Study of materials science is an important aspect of curricula at universities worldwide. This text is designed to serve students at a fundamental level, positioning materials design as an essential aspect of the study of electronics, medicine, and energy storage. Now in its 3rd edition, Principles of Inorganic Materials Design is an introduction to relevant topics including inorganic materials structure/property relations and material behaviors. The new edition now includes chapters on computational materials science, intermetallic compounds, and covalent compounds. The text is meant to aid students in their studies by providing additional tools to study the key concepts and understand recent developments in materials research. In addition to the many topics covered, the textbook includes: Accessible learning tools to help students better understand keTable of ContentsForeword to Second Edition xiii Foreword to First Edition xv Preface to Third Edition xix Preface to Second Edition xx Preface to First Edition xxi Acronyms xxiii 1 Crystallographic Considerations 1 1.1 Degrees of Crystallinity 1 1.1.1 Monocrystalline Solids 2 1.1.2 Quasicrystalline Solids 3 1.1.3 Polycrystalline Solids 4 1.1.4 Semicrystalline Solids 5 1.1.5 Amorphous Solids 8 1.2 Basic Crystallography 8 1.2.1 Crystal Geometry 8 1.2.1.1 Types of Crystallographic Symmetry 12 1.2.1.2 Space Group Symmetry 17 1.2.1.3 Lattice Planes and Directions 27 1.3 Single-Crystal Morphology and Its Relationship to Lattice Symmetry 32 1.4 Twinned Crystals, Grain Boundaries, and Bicrystallography 37 1.4.1 Twinned Crystals and Twinning 37 1.4.2 Crystallographic Orientation Relationships in Bicrystals 39 1.4.2.1 The Coincidence Site Lattice 39 1.4.2.2 Equivalent Axis–Angle Pairs 44 1.5 Amorphous Solids and Glasses 46 1.5.1 Oxide Glasses 49 1.5.2 Metallic Glasses and Metal–Organic Framework Glasses 51 1.5.3 Aerogels 53 Practice Problems 53 References 55 2 Microstructural Considerations 57 2.1 Materials Length Scales 57 2.1.1 Experimental Resolution of Material Features 61 2.2 Grain Boundaries in Polycrystalline Materials 63 2.2.1 Grain Boundary Orientations 63 2.2.2 Dislocation Model of Low Angle Grain Boundaries 65 2.2.3 Grain Boundary Energy 66 2.2.4 Special Types of “Low-Energy” Boundaries 68 2.2.5 Grain Boundary Dynamics 69 2.2.6 Representing Orientation Distributions in Polycrystalline Aggregates 70 2.3 Materials Processing and Microstructure 72 2.3.1 Conventional Solidification 72 2.3.1.1 Grain Homogeneity 74 2.3.1.2 Grain Morphology 76 2.3.1.3 Zone Melting Techniques 78 2.3.2 Deformation Processing 79 2.3.3 Consolidation Processing 79 2.3.4 Thin-Film Formation 80 2.3.4.1 Epitaxy 81 2.3.4.2 Polycrystalline PVD Thin Films 81 2.3.4.3 Polycrystalline CVD Thin Films 83 2.4 Microstructure and Materials Properties 83 2.4.1 Mechanical Properties 83 2.4.2 Transport Properties 86 2.4.3 Magnetic and Dielectric Properties 90 2.4.4 Chemical Properties 92 2.5 Microstructure Control and Design 93 Practice Problems 96 References 96 3 Crystal Structures and Binding Forces 99 3.1 Structure Description Methods 99 3.1.1 Close Packing 99 3.1.2 Polyhedra 103 3.1.3 The (Primitive) Unit Cell 103 3.1.4 Space Groups and Wyckoff Positions 104 3.1.5 Strukturbericht Symbols 104 3.1.6 Pearson Symbols 105 3.2 Cohesive Forces in Solids 106 3.2.1 Ionic Bonding 106 3.2.2 Covalent Bonding 108 3.2.3 Dative Bonds 110 3.2.4 Metallic Bonding 111 3.2.5 Atoms and Bonds as Electron Charge Density 112 3.3 Chemical Potential Energy 113 3.3.1 Lattice Energy for Ionic Crystals 114 3.3.2 The Born–Haber Cycle 119 3.3.3 Goldschmidt’s Rules and Pauling’s Rules 120 3.3.4 Total Energy 122 3.3.5 Electronic Origin of Coordination Polyhedra in Covalent Crystals 124 3.4 Common Structure Types 127 3.4.1 Iono-covalent Solids 128 3.4.1.1 AX Compounds 128 3.4.1.2 AX2 Compounds 130 3.4.1.3 AX6 Compounds 132 3.4.1.4 ABX2 Compounds 132 3.4.1.5 AB2X4 Compounds (Spinel and Olivine Structures) 134 3.4.1.6 ABX3 Compounds (Perovskite and Related Phases) 135 3.4.1.7 A2B2O5(ABO2.5) Compounds (Oxygen-Deficient Perovskites) 137 3.4.1.8 AxByOz Compounds (Bronzes) 139 3.4.1.9 A2B2X7 Compounds (Pyrochlores) 139 3.4.1.10 Silicate Compounds 140 3.4.1.11 Porous Structures 141 3.4.2 Metal Carbides, Silicides, Borides, Hydrides, and Nitrides 144 3.4.3 Metallic Alloys and Intermetallic Compounds 144 3.4.3.1 Zintl Phases 147 3.4.3.2 Nonpolar Binary Intermetallic Phases 149 3.4.3.3 Ternary Intermetallic Phases 151 3.5 Structural Disturbances 153 3.5.1 Intrinsic Point Defects 154 3.5.2 Extrinsic Point Defects 155 3.5.3 Structural Distortions 156 3.5.4 Bond Valence Sum Calculations 158 3.6 Structure Control and Synthetic Strategies 162 Practice Problems 165 References 167 4 The Electronic Level I: An Overview of Band Theory 171 4.1 The Many-Body Schrödinger Equation and Hartree–Fock 171 4.2 Choice of Boundary Conditions: Born’s Conditions 177 4.3 Free-Electron Model for Metals: From Drude (Classical) to Sommerfeld (Fermi–Dirac) 179 4.4 Bloch’s Theorem, Bloch Waves, Energy Bands, and Fermi Energy 180 4.5 Reciprocal Space and Brillouin Zones 182 4.6 Choices of Basis Sets and Band Structure with Applicative Examples 188 4.6.1 From the Free-Electron Model to the Plane Wave Expansion 189 4.6.2 Fermi Surface, Brillouin Zone Boundaries, and Alkali Metals versus Copper 191 4.6.3 Understanding Metallic Phase Stability in Alloys 193 4.6.4 The Localized Orbital Basis Set Method 195 4.6.5 Understanding Band Structure Diagram with Rhenium Trioxide 196 4.6.6 Probing DOS Band Structure in Metallic Alloys 199 4.7 Breakdown of the Independent-Electron Approximation 200 4.8 Density Functional Theory: The Successor to the Hartree–Fock Approach in Materials Science 202 4.9 The Continuous Quest for Better DFT XC Functionals 205 4.10 Van der Waals Forces and DFT 208 Practice Problems 210 References 210 5 The Electronic Level II: The Tight-Binding Electronic Structure Approximation 213 5.1 The General LCAO Method 214 5.2 Extension of the LCAO Treatment to Crystalline Solids 219 5.3 Orbital Interactions in Monatomic Solids 221 5.3.1 σ-Bonding Interactions 221 5.3.2 π-Bonding Interactions 225 5.4 Tight-Binding Assumptions 229 5.5 Qualitative LCAO Band Structures 232 5.5.1 Illustration 1: Transition Metal Oxides with Vertex-Sharing Octahedra 236 5.5.2 Illustration 2: Reduced Dimensional Systems 238 5.5.3 Illustration 3: Transition Metal Monoxides with Edge-Sharing Octahedra 240 5.5.4 Corollary 243 5.6 Total Energy Tight-Binding Calculations 244 Practice Problems 246 References 246 6 Transport Properties 249 6.1 An Introduction to Tensors 249 6.2 Microscopic Theory of Electrical Transport in Ceramics: The Role of Point Defects 254 6.2.1 Oxygen-Deficient/Metal Excess and Metal-Deficient/Oxygen Excess Oxides 256 6.2.2 Substitutions by Aliovalent Cations with Valence Isoelectronicity 261 6.2.3 Substitutions by Isovalent Cations That are Not Valence Isoelectronic 263 6.2.4 Nitrogen Vacancies in Nitrides 266 6.3 Thermal Conductivity 268 6.3.1 The Free Electron Contribution 269 6.3.2 The Phonon Contribution 271 6.4 Electrical Conductivity 274 6.4.1 Band Structure Considerations 278 6.4.1.1 Conductors 278 6.4.1.2 Insulators 279 6.4.1.3 Semiconductors 281 6.4.1.4 Semimetals 290 6.4.2 Thermoelectric, Photovoltaic, and Magnetotransport Properties 292 6.4.2.1 Thermoelectrics 292 6.4.2.2 Photovoltaics 298 6.4.2.3 Galvanomagnetic Effects and Magnetotransport Properties 301 6.4.3 Superconductors 303 6.4.4 Improving Bulk Electrical Conduction in Polycrystalline, Multiphasic, and Composite Materials 307 6.5 Mass Transport 308 6.5.1 Atomic Diffusion 309 6.5.2 Ionic Conduction 316 Practice Problems 321 References 322 7 Hopping Conduction and Metal–Insulator Transitions 325 7.1 Correlated Systems 327 7.1.1 The Mott–Hubbard Insulating State 329 7.1.2 Charge-Transfer Insulators 334 7.1.3 Marginal Metals 334 7.2 Anderson Localization 336 7.3 Experimentally Distinguishing Disorder from Electron Correlation 340 7.4 Tuning the M–I Transition 343 7.5 Other Types of Electronic Transitions 345 Practice Problems 347 References 347 8 Magnetic and Dielectric Properties 349 8.1 Phenomenological Description of Magnetic Behavior 351 8.1.1 Magnetization Curves 354 8.1.2 Susceptibility Curves 355 8.2 Atomic States and Term Symbols of Free Ions 359 8.3 Atomic Origin of Paramagnetism 365 8.3.1 Orbital Angular Momentum Contribution: The Free Ion Case 366 8.3.2 Spin Angular Momentum Contribution: The Free Ion Case 367 8.3.3 Total Magnetic Moment: The Free Ion Case 368 8.3.4 Spin–Orbit Coupling: The Free Ion Case 368 8.3.5 Single Ions in Crystals 371 8.3.5.1 Orbital Momentum Quenching 371 8.3.5.2 Spin Momentum Quenching 373 8.3.5.3 The Effect of JT Distortions 373 8.3.6 Solids 374 8.4 Diamagnetism 376 8.5 Spontaneous Magnetic Ordering 377 8.5.1 Exchange Interactions 379 8.5.1.1 Direct Exchange and Superexchange Interactions in Magnetic Insulators 382 8.5.1.2 Indirect Exchange Interactions 387 8.5.2 Itinerant Ferromagnetism 390 8.5.3 Noncollinear Spin Configurations and Magnetocrystalline Anisotropy 394 8.5.3.1 Geometric Frustration 394 8.5.3.2 Magnetic Anisotropy 397 8.5.3.3 Magnetic Domains 398 8.5.4 Ferromagnetic Properties of Amorphous Metals 401 8.6 Magnetotransport Properties 401 8.6.1 The Double Exchange Mechanism 402 8.6.2 The Half-Metallic Ferromagnet Model 403 8.7 Magnetostriction 404 8.8 Dielectric Properties 405 8.8.1 The Microscopic Equations 407 8.8.2 Piezoelectricity 408 8.8.3 Pyroelectricity 414 8.8.4 Ferroelectricity 416 Practice Problems 421 References 422 9 Optical Properties of Materials 425 9.1 Maxwell’s Equations 425 9.2 Refractive Index 428 9.3 Absorption 436 9.4 Nonlinear Effects 441 9.5 Summary 446 Practice Problems 446 References 447 10 Mechanical Properties 449 10.1 Stress and Strain 449 10.2 Elasticity 452 10.2.1 The Elasticity Tensors 455 10.2.2 Elastically Isotropic and Anisotropic Solids 459 10.2.3 The Relation Between Elasticity and the Cohesive Forces in a Solid 465 10.2.3.1 Bulk Modulus 466 10.2.3.2 Rigidity (Shear) Modulus 467 10.2.3.3 Young’s Modulus 470 10.2.4 Superelasticity, Pseudoelasticity, and the Shape Memory Effect 473 10.3 Plasticity 475 10.3.1 The Dislocation-Based Mechanism to Plastic Deformation 481 10.3.2 Polycrystalline Metals 487 10.3.3 Brittle and Semi-brittle Solids 489 10.3.4 The Correlation Between the Electronic Structure and the Plasticity of Materials 490 10.4 Fracture 491 Practice Problems 494 References 495 11 Phase Equilibria, Phase Diagrams, and Phase Modeling 499 11.1 Thermodynamic Systems and Equilibrium 500 11.1.1 Equilibrium Thermodynamics 504 11.2 Thermodynamic Potentials and the Laws 507 11.3 Understanding Phase Diagrams 510 11.3.1 Unary Systems 510 11.3.2 Binary Systems 511 11.3.3 Ternary Systems 518 11.3.4 Metastable Equilibria 522 11.4 Experimental Phase Diagram Determinations 522 11.5 Phase Diagram Modeling 523 11.5.1 Gibbs Energy Expressions for Mixtures and Solid Solutions 524 11.5.2 Gibbs Energy Expressions for Phases with Long-Range Order 527 11.5.3 Other Contributions to the Gibbs Energy 530 11.5.4 Phase Diagram Extrapolations: The CALPHAD Method 531 Practice Problems 534 References 535 12 Synthetic Strategies 537 12.1 Synthetic Strategies 538 12.1.1 Direct Combination 538 12.1.2 Low Temperature 540 12.1.2.1 Sol–Gel 540 12.1.2.2 Solvothermal 543 12.1.2.3 Intercalation 544 12.1.3 Defects 546 12.1.4 Combinatorial Synthesis 548 12.1.5 Spinodal Decomposition 548 12.1.6 Thin Films 550 12.1.7 Photonic Materials 552 12.1.8 Nanosynthesis 553 12.1.8.1 Liquid Phase Techniques 554 12.1.8.2 Vapor/Aerosol Methods 556 12.1.8.3 Combined Strategies 556 12.2 Summary 558 Practice Problems 559 References 559 13 An Introduction to Nanomaterials 563 13.1 History of Nanotechnology 564 13.2 Nanomaterials Properties 565 13.2.1 Electrical Properties 566 13.2.2 Magnetic Properties 567 13.2.3 Optical Properties 567 13.2.4 Thermal Properties 568 13.2.5 Mechanical Properties 569 13.2.6 Chemical Reactivity 570 13.3 More on Nanomaterials Preparative Techniques 572 13.3.1 Top-Down Methods for the Fabrication of Nanocrystalline Materials 572 13.3.1.1 Nanostructured Thin Films 572 13.3.1.2 Nanocrystalline Bulk Phases 573 13.3.2 Bottom-Up Methods for the Synthesis of Nanostructured Solids 574 13.3.2.1 Precipitation 575 13.3.2.2 Hydrothermal Techniques 576 13.3.2.3 Micelle-Assisted Routes 577 13.3.2.4 Thermolysis, Photolysis, and Sonolysis 580 13.3.2.5 Sol–Gel Methods 581 13.3.2.6 Polyol Method 582 13.3.2.7 High-Temperature Organic Polyol Reactions (IBM Nanoparticle Synthesis) 584 13.3.2.8 Additive Manufacturing (3D Printing) 584 References 586 14 Introduction to Computational Materials Science 589 14.1 A Short History of Computational Materials Science 590 14.1.1 1945–1965: The Dawn of Computational Materials Science 591 14.1.2 1965–2000: Steady Progress Through Continued Advances in Hardware and Software 595 14.1.3 2000–Present: High-Performance and Cloud Computing 598 14.2 Spatial and Temporal Scales, Computational Expense, and Reliability of Solid-State Calculations 600 14.3 Illustrative Examples 604 14.3.1 Exploration of the Local Atomic Structure in Multi-principal Element Alloys by Quantum Molecular Dynamics 604 14.3.2 Magnetic Properties of a Series of Double Perovskite Oxides A2BCO6 (A = Sr, Ca; B = Cr; C = Mo, Re, W) by Monte Carlo Simulations in the Framework of the Ising Model 606 14.3.3 Crystal Plasticity Finite Element Method (CPFEM) Analysis for Modeling Plasticity in Polycrystalline Alloys 613 References 617 15 Case Study I: TiO2 619 15.1 Crystallography 619 15.2 Microstructure 623 15.3 Bonding 626 15.4 Electronic Structure 627 15.5 Transport 628 15.6 Metal–Insulator Transitions 632 15.7 Magnetic and Dielectric Properties 632 15.8 Optical Properties 634 15.9 Mechanical Properties 635 15.10 Phase Equilibria 636 15.11 Synthesis 638 15.12 Nanomaterial 639 Practice Questions 639 References 640 16 Case Study II: GaN 643 16.1 Crystallography 643 16.2 Microstructure 646 16.3 Bonding 647 16.4 Electronic Structure 647 16.5 Transport 648 16.6 Metal–Insulator Transitions 650 16.7 Magnetic and Dielectric Properties 652 16.8 Optical Properties 652 16.9 Mechanical Properties 653 16.10 Phase Equilibria 654 16.11 Synthesis 654 16.12 Nanomaterial 656 Practice Questions 657 References 658 Appendix A: List of the 230 Space Groups 659 Appendix B: The 32 Crystal Systems and the 47 Possible Forms 665 Appendix C: Principles of Tensors 667 Appendix D: Solutions to Practice Problems 679 Index 683

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Authors iii Preface to the Fourth Edition iv Notes to Instructors v Digital Resources and WileyPLUS vii Postscript: Introduction to an Author viii Nomenclature ix Glossary xi Part 1 Engineering Problem Analysis 1 Chapter 1 What Some Chemical Engineers Do for a Living 3 Chapter 2 Introduction to Engineering Calculations 5 2.0 Learning Objectives 5 2.1 Units and Dimensions 6 2.2 Conversion of Units 7 2.3 Systems of Units 8 2.4 Force and Weight 10 2.5 Numerical Calculation and Estimation 12 2.6 Dimensional Homogeneity and Dimensionless Quantities 19 2.7 Process Data Representation and Analysis 21 2.8 Summary 29 Problems 30 Chapter 3 Processes and Process Variables 45 3.0 Learning Objectives 45 3.1 Mass and Volume 46 3.2 Flow Rate 48 3.3 Chemical Composition 50 3.4 Pressure 57 3.5 Temperature 64 3.6 Summary 67 Problems 68 Part 2 Material Balances 89 Chapter 4 Fundamentals of Material Balances 91 4.0 Learning Objectives 91 4.1 Process Classification 92 4.2 Balances 93 4.3 Material Balance Calculations 97 4.4 Balances on Multiple-Unit Processes 116 4.5 Recycle and Bypass 122 4.6 Chemical Reaction Stoichiometry 129 4.7 Balances on Reactive Processes 140 4.8 Combustion Reactions 161 4.9 Some Additional Considerations about Chemical Processes 169 4.10 Summary 172 Problems 173 Chapter 5 Single-Phase Systems 216 5.0 Learning Objectives 217 5.1 Liquid and Solid Densities 218 5.2 Ideal Gases 220 5.3 Equations of State for Nonideal Gases 228 5.4 The Compressibility-Factor Equation of State 235 5.5 Summary 242 Problems 242 Chapter 6 Multiphase Systems 273 6.0 Learning Objectives 275 6.1 Single-Component Phase Equilibrium 276 6.2 The Gibbs Phase Rule 282 6.3 Gas–Liquid Systems: One Condensable Component 284 6.4 Multicomponent Gas–Liquid Systems 290 6.5 Solutions of Solids in Liquids 299 6.6 Equilibrium Between Two Liquid Phases 307 6.7 Adsorption on Solid Surfaces 311 6.8 Summary 314 Problems 316 Part 3 Energy Balances 353 Chapter 7 Energy and Energy Balances 355 7.0 Learning Objectives 356 7.1 Forms of Energy: The First Law of Thermodynamics 357 7.2 Kinetic and Potential Energy 359 7.3 Energy Balances on Closed Systems 360 7.4 Energy Balances on Open Systems at Steady State 362 7.5 Tables of Thermodynamic Data 367 7.6 Energy Balance Procedures 372 7.7 Mechanical Energy Balances 375 7.8 Summary 380 Problems 382 Chapter 8 Balances on Nonreactive Processes 402 8.0 Learning Objectives 402 8.1 Elements of Energy Balance Calculations 403 8.2 Changes in Pressure at Constant Temperature 411 8.3 Changes in Temperature 412 8.4 Phase-Change Operations 424 8.5 Mixing and Solution 443 8.6 Summary 454 Problems 456 Chapter 9 Balances on Reactive Processes 493 9.0 Learning Objectives 494 9.1 Heats of Reaction 494 9.2 Measurement and Calculation of Heats of Reaction: Hess’s Law 499 9.3 Formation Reactions and Heats of Formation 501 9.4 Heats of Combustion 503 9.5 Energy Balances on Reactive Processes 504 9.6 Fuels and Combustion 519 9.7 Summary 529 Problems 531 Chapter 10 Balances on Transient Processes 570 10.0 Learning Objectives 570 10.1 The General Balance Equation . . . Again 570 10.2 Material Balances 575 10.3 Energy Balances on Single-Phase Nonreactive Processes 582 10.4 Simultaneous Transient Balances 587 10.5 Summary 590 Problems 591 Appendix A Computational Techniques 607 A.1 The Method of Least Squares 607 A.2 Iterative Solution of Nonlinear Algebraic Equations 610 A.3 Numerical Integration 623 Appendix B Physical Property Tables 627 B.1 Selected Physical Property Data 628 B.2 Heat Capacities 635 B.3 Vapor Pressure of Water 638 B.4 Antoine Equation Constants 640 B.5 Properties of Saturated Steam: Temperature Table 642 B.6 Properties of Saturated Steam: Pressure Table 644 B.7 Properties of Superheated Steam 650 B.8 Specific Enthalpies of Selected Gases: SI Units 652 B.9 Specific Enthalpies of Selected Gases: U.S. Customary Units 652 B.10 Atomic Heat Capacities for Kopp’s Rule 653 B.11 Integral Heats of Solution and Mixing at 25°C 653 Answers to Test Yourselves 654 Answers to Selected Problems 662 Index 667

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to the fundamental concepts and rules in bioelectrochemistry and explores latest advancements in the field Bioelectrochemical Interface Engineering offers a guide to this burgeoning interdisciplinary field. The authorsnoted experts on the topicpresent a detailed explanation of the field's basic concepts, provide a fundamental understanding of the principle of electrocatalysis, electrochemical activity of the electroactive microorganisms, and mechanisms of electron transfer at electrode-electrolyte interfaces. They also explore the design and development of bioelectrochemical systems. The authors review recent advances in the field including: the development of new bioelectrochemical configurations, new electrode materials, electrode functionalization strategies, and extremophilic electroactive microorganisms. These current developments hold the promise of powering the systems in remote locations such as deep sea and extra-terrestrial space as well as powering implantTable of ContentsList of Contributors xxi Preface xxix 1 Electrochemical Performance Analyses of Biofilms 1J. Jayapriya and V. Ramamurthy 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Electrochemical Principles 1 1.3 Cyclic Voltammetry 2 1.4 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 7 1.5 Electrochemical Noise (ECN) Technique 14 1.6 Conclusion 17 Acknowledgments 17 References 17 Further Reading 19 Take‐home Message 19 Test Yourself 19 2 Direct Electron Transfer in Redox Enzymes and Microorganisms 21Sheela Berchmans and T. Balamurugan 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Wiring Enzymes to the Electrode Surface 22 2.3 Wiring Microorganisms to the Electrode Surface 26 References 30 Take‐home Message 34 Test Yourself 34 3 Electrochemical Techniques and Applications to Characterize Single‐ and Multicellular Electric Microbial Functions 37Junki Saito, Muralidharan Murugan, Xiao Deng, Alexis Guionet, Waheed Miran, and Akihiro Okamoto 3.1 Introduction to Microbial Electrochemical Functions and Processes 37 3.2 Electrochemical Techniques Related to Single‐cell Processes 38 3.3 Electrochemical Techniques Related to Biofilm Processes 43 3.4 Techniques to Analyze Nanowires 45 References 48 Take‐home Message 52 Test Yourself 52 4 Electrochemical Analysis of Single Cells 55Maedeh Mozneb, Christine Smothers, Pablo Rodriguez, and Chen‐Zhong Li 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Single‐cell Analysis Applications and Current Technologies 56 4.3 Electrochemical Methods for Single‐cell Analysis 57 4.4 Microelectrodes for Single‐cell Analysis 62 4.5 Electroluminescence‐based Single‐cell Measurements 69 4.6 Lab‐on‐chip‐based Single‐cell Analysis 70 4.7 Conclusion 71 References 71 Take‐home Message 75 Test Yourself 76 5 Biocorrosion 77C. Chandrasatheesh and J. Jayapriya 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 Microorganisms Involved in Corrosion 78 5.3 Mechanisms 80 5.4 Biocorrosion Control Strategies 82 5.5 Materials Vulnerable to Biocorrosion 83 5.6 Biocorrosion of Biomedical Implants 84 5.7 Biocorrosion Detection Techniques 85 5.8 Conclusion 86 Acknowledgements 86 References 86 Further Reading 89 Take‐home Message 89 Test Yourself 90 6 Microbial Fuel Cells: A Sustainable Technology for Pollutant Removal and Power Generation 91Somdipta Bagchi and Manaswini Behera 6.1 Introduction 91 6.2 Microbial Fuel Cells 92 6.3 Measuring Performance 94 6.4 MFC Configuration 98 6.5 Materials 100 6.6 Limitations in MFCs 104 6.7 Other MFC‐based Technologies 106 6.8 Pilot‐scale MFCs 107 References 108 Take‐home Message 115 Test Yourself 115 7 Biophotovoltaics: Molecular Mechanisms and Applications 117Angelaalincy Maria Joseph, Sangeetha Ramalingam, Pushpalatha Selvaraj, Komal Rani, Kalpana Ramaraju, Gunaseelan Sathaiah, Ashokkumar Balasubramaniem, and Varalakshmi Perumal 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Photocurrent Generation with Biological Catalysts 118 7.3 Photosynthetic Microbes as Photobioelectrocatalysts in BESs 119 7.4 Biocatalysts of Photosynthetic Organisms 119 7.5 Electron Transfer in Microalgae During Photosynthesis (Light Reaction) 120 7.6 Electron Transfer Mechanisms in Purple Photosynthetic Bacteria 124 7.7 Electron Transfer Mechanisms of Cyanobacteria 128 7.8 Models of Solar Energy Conversion Devices 129 7.9 Applications and Future Perspectives 131 7.10 Conclusion 132 References 132 Take‐home Message 135 Test Yourself 135 8 An Insight into Plant Microbial Fuel Cells 137Pranab Jyoti Sarma and Kaustubha Mohanty 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Different Types of Plants and Their Bioelectricity Generation Capabilities 138 8.3 Bioprocess Structure 139 8.4 Variation in PMFC Types, Operating Conditions, Design, Electrodes, and Membranes Used 141 8.5 PMFCs as New Electricity Generation Technology 142 8.6 Challenges of PMFCs 144 8.7 Conclusion 144 References 144 Take‐home Message 146 Test Yourself 147 9 Electroanalytical Techniques for Investigating Biofilms in Microbial Fuel Cells 149Smita S. Kumar, Vivek Kumar, and Suddhasatwa Basu 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Conventional Biofilm Investigation Techniques 151 9.3 Electroanalytical Techniques 151 9.4 Electrode Polarization 154 9.5 Voltammetry (LSV) 155 9.6 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy 159 9.7 Electrochemical Quartz Crystal Microbalance (e‐QCM) 159 9.8 Conclusion 160 Acknowledgments 160 References 160 Take‐home Message 162 Test Yourself 162 10 Progress in Development of Electrode Materials in Microbial Fuel Cells 165Alka Pareek and S. Venkata Mohan 10.1 Introduction 165 10.2 Electrode Materials in MFCs 166 10.3 Effect of Surface Treatment on Electrodes 176 10.4 Conclusion 177 Acknowledgments 177 References 178 Take‐home Message 185 Test Yourself 185 11 Synthetic Biology Strategies to Improve Electron Transfer Rate at the Microbe–Anode Interface in Microbial Fuel Cells 187Tian Zhang, Dipankar Ghosh, and Pier‐Luc Tremblay 11.1 Introduction 187 11.2 Extracellular Electron Transfer (EET) Mechanisms from the Microbe to the Anode 188 11.3 Synthetic Biology Strategies to Improve the EET Rate from Microbes to Anode 193 11.4 Synthetic Biology to Optimize Current Generation by Yeast 199 11.5 Conclusion 200 References 200 Take‐home Message 207 Test Yourself 208 12 Microbial Electrolysis Cells (MECs): A Promising and Green Approach for Bioenergy and Biochemical Production from Waste Resources 209Abudukeremu Kadier, Mohd Sahaid Kalil, Pankaj Kumar Rai, Smita S. Kumar, Peyman Abdeshahian, Periyasamy Sivagurunathan, Hassimi Abu Hasan, Aidil Abdul Hamid, and Azah Mohamed 12.1 Introduction 209 12.2 Fundamentals of MEC Technology 210 12.3 Crucial Factors Governing the Performance of MECs 212 12.4 Current Applications of MECs 219 12.5 Conclusion 224 Acknowledgments 224 References 224 Take‐home Message 234 Test Yourself 234 13 Microbial Desalination Cells 235Swati Sharma, Ademola Hammed, and Halis Simsek 13.1 Introduction 235 13.2 Overview of Desalination Cells 236 13.3 MDC Applications and Concepts 237 13.4 Desalination in MDCs 239 13.5 Different Configurations of MDCs 239 13.6 Conclusion 246 References 246 Take‐home Message 248 Test Yourself 248 14 Microbially Charged Redox Flow Batteries for Bioenergy Storage 251Márcia S.S. Santos, Luciana Peixoto, Célia Dias‐Ferreira, Adélio Mendes, and M. Madalena Alves 14.1 Introduction 251 14.2 Redox Flow Batteries 251 14.3 Organic Compounds for RFBs 256 14.4 Coupling RFBs with Renewable Energy Production Technologies 259 14.5 Future Perspectives 261 14.6 Conclusion 262 Acknowledgments 262 References 262 Take‐home Message 268 Test Yourself 269 15 Artificial Photosynthesis: Current Advances and Challenges 271Joanna Kargul and Małgorzata Kiliszek 15.1 Introduction 271 15.2 Basic Principles of Natural Photosynthesis 272 15.3 Artificial Photosynthetic Systems 277 15.4 Strategies for Improvement of Photoelectrode Performance 287 15.5 Operational Dye‐sensitized Solar Cells and Solar‐to‐Fuel Devices 289 15.6 Conclusion 291 Acknowledgments 292 References 292 Take‐home Message 308 Abbreviations 308 Test Yourself 309 16 Bioelectrochemical Systems for Production of Valuable Compounds 311Luciana Peixoto, Sónia G. Barbosa, M. Madalena Alves, and Maria Alcina Pereira 16.1 Introduction 311 16.2 From Electricity to Product 313 16.3 Conclusion 318 Acknowledgments 318 References 318 Take‐home Message 323 Test Yourself 323 17 Modernization of Biosensing Strategies for the Development of Lab‐on‐Chip Integrated Systems 325Sharmili Roy, Shweta J. Malode, Nagaraj P. Shetti, and Pranjal Chandra 17.1 Introduction 325 17.2 Types of Biosensors 326 17.3 Lab‐on‐Chip Technologies 334 17.4 Conclusion 336 Acknowledgment 336 References 336 Take‐home Message 341 Test Yourself 341 18 Electrochemical Immunosensors: Working Principle, Types, Scope, Applications, and Future Prospects 343Shakila Harshavardhan, Sam Ebenezer Rajadas, Kevin Kumar Vijayakumar, Willsingh Anbu Durai, Andy Ramu, and Rajan Mariappan 18.1 Introduction 343 18.2 Immunosensors in Protein Immunoassays 345 18.3 Types of Immunosensors 346 18.4 Impedimetric Immunosensors 348 18.5 Potentiometric Immunosensors 352 18.6 Voltammetric and Amperometric Immunosensors 353 18.7 Conductometric Immunosensors 355 18.8 Capacitive Immunosensors 356 18.9 Role of Nanomaterials in Immunosensors 357 18.10 Applications of Immunosensors 358 18.11 Conclusion 360 References 361 Take‐home Message 368 Test Yourself 368 19 Recent Updates on Inkjet‐Printed Sensors 371Naresh Kumar Mani, Anusha Prabhu, and Annamalai Senthil Kumar 19.1 Introduction 371 19.2 Inkjet‐Printed Electrochemical‐Based Sensors 372 19.3 Inkjet‐Printed Colorimetric‐based Sensors 377 19.4 Inkjet‐Printed Fluorescence‐based Sensors 378 19.5 Other Techniques and Developed Devices 379 19.6 Summary and Future Perspectives 381 Acknowledgments 381 References 381 Take‐home Message 384 Test Yourself 384 20 Electrochemical Systems for Healthcare Applications 385Pandiaraj Manickam, Vairamani Kanagavel, Apurva Sonawane, S.P. Thipperudraswamy, and Shekhar Bhansali 20.1 Introduction 385 20.2 Point‐of‐care Sensor Systems 386 20.3 Wearable Electrochemical Systems 393 20.4 Implantable Electrochemical Nanodevices 401 20.5 Conclusion 405 Acknowledgments 405 References 405 Take‐home Message 409 Test Yourself 409 21 Synthetic Strategies of Nanobioconjugates for Bioelectrochemical Applications 411T. Selvamani, D. Gangadharan, and Sambandam Anandan 21.1 Introduction 411 21.2 Fabrication Processes of Nanobioconjugated Systems 412 21.3 Applications of Nanobioconjugates 423 21.4 Conclusion 426 References 426 Take‐home Message 429 Test Yourself 429 22 Electrochemical Biosensors with Nanointerface for Food, Water Quality, and Healthcare Applications 431John Bosco Balaguru Rayappan, Noel Nesakumar, Lakshmishri Ramachandra Bhat, Manju Bhargavi Gumpu, K. Jayanth Babu, and Arockia Jayalatha JBB 22.1 Introduction 431 22.2 Enzymatic Redox‐type Biosensors 440 22.3 Water 446 22.4 Enzymatic Inhibition–type Biosensors 452 22.5 Water Quality 455 22.6 Conclusion 456 Acknowledgments 457 References 457 Take‐home Message 466 Test Yourself 467 23 Enzymatic Electrode–Electrolyte Interface Study During Electrochemical Sensing of Biomolecules 469Ashish Kumar, Priya Singh, and Rajiv Prakash 23.1 Introduction 469 23.2 Conducting Substrates for Sensing Applications 470 23.3 Sensing Techniques 472 23.4 Electrochemical Techniques for Sensing Analytes 472 23.5 Different Modified Electrodes for Enzyme Functionalization 474 23.6 A Plausible Mechanism of Electron Transfer: An Electrochemical Equivalent Circuit Analysis 474 23.7 Enzyme‐less Glucose Oxidation: Off Course for a New Generation? 476 23.8 Conclusion 477 References 477 Take‐home Message 483 Test Yourself 483 24 Quantum Dots for Bioelectrochemical Applications 485İlker Polatoğlu, Erdal Eroğlu, and Levent Aydın 24.1 Introduction 485 24.2 Nanotechnology 485 24.3 Structure of QDs 486 24.4 Characteristics of QDs 487 24.5 Synthesis Processes 488 24.6 Electrochemical Sensing of QDs 489 24.7 Biosensor Technology 490 24.8 Bioelectrochemical Applications of QDs 491 24.9 QDs: Modeling and Optimizations 494 24.10 Conclusion 498 References 498 Take‐home Message 502 Test Yourself 502 25 Enzymatic Self‐powered Biosensing Devices 505Felismina T.C. Moreira, Manuela F. Frasco, Sónia G. Barbosa, Luciana Peixoto, M. Madalena Alves, and M. Goreti F. Sales 25.1 Enzymatic Fuel Cells 505 25.2 Electron Transfer Mechanisms 505 25.3 Enzyme Immobilization 507 25.4 EFC‐based Biosensors 509 25.5 Conclusion 514 Acknowledgments 515 References 515 Take‐home Message 519 Test Yourself 519 Index 521

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a strong foundation in electrochemical principles and best practices Written for undergraduate majors in chemistry and chemical engineering, this book teaches the basic principles of electroanalytical chemistry and illustrates best practices through the use of case studies of organic reactions and catalysis using voltammetric methods and of the measurement of clinical and environmental analytes by potentiometric techniques. It provides insight beyond the field of analysis as students address problems arising in many areas of science and technology. The book also emphasizes electrochemical phenomena and conceptual models to help readers understand the influence of experimental conditions and the interpretation of results for common potentiometric and voltammetric methods. Electroanalytical Chemistry: Principles, Best Practices, and Case Studies begins by introducing some basic concepts in electrical phenomena. It then moves on to a chapter that exTable of ContentsPreface ix 1. Basic Electrical Principles 1 1.1 Overview 2 1.2 Basic Concepts 4 1.2.1 Volt Defined 7 1.2.2 Current Defined 7 1.2.3 Oxidation and Reduction 8 1.2.4 Current and Faraday’s Law 8 1.2.5 Potential, Work, and Gibbs’ Free Energy Change 9 1.2.6 Methods Based on Voltage Measurement Versus Current Measurement 10 1.3 Electrochemical Cells 10 1.3.1 Electrodes 10 1.3.2 Cell Resistance 12 1.3.3 Supporting Electrolyte 13 1.4 The Electrified Interface or Electrical Double Layer 14 1.4.1 Structure of the Double Layer 14 1.4.2 The Relationship Between Double Layer Charge and the Potential at the Electrode Interface 20 1.5 Conductance 22 1.6 Mass Transport by Convection and Diffusion 24 1.7 Liquid Junction Potentials 26 Problems 29 References 29 2. Potentiometry of Oxidation–Reduction Processes 31 2.1 Overview 31 2.2 Measuring “Open Circuit” Potentials 33 2.3 Solution Redox Potential 34 2.3.1 The Development of a Charge Separation 35 2.3.2 The Nernst Equation 36 2.3.3 Formal Potential 38 2.3.4 Active Metal Indicator Electrodes 41 2.3.5 Redox Titrations 52 2.3.6 Oxidation–Reduction Potential (ORP) or EH 55 2.3.7 Environmental Applications of Redox Measurements 57 Problems 64 References 66 3. Potentiometry of Ion Selective Electrodes 69 3.1 Overview 69 3.2 Liquid Membrane Devices 73 3.2.1 Selective Accumulation of Ions Inside an Organic Liquid 73 3.2.2 Theory of Membrane Potentials 77 3.2.3 Liquid Membrane Ionophores 80 3.3 Glass Membrane Sensors 82 3.3.1 History of the Development of a Glass Sensor of pH 82 3.3.2 Glass Structure and Sensor Properties 83 3.3.3 Selective Ion Exchange Model 87 3.3.4 The Combination pH Electrode 88 3.3.5 Gas-Sensing Electrodes 89 3.4 Crystalline Membrane Electrodes 93 3.5 Calibration Curves and Detection Limits 96 3.6 A Revolutionary Improvement in Detection Limits 100 3.7 More Recent Ion Selective Electrode Innovations 102 3.7.1 The Function of the Inner Reference Electrode 103 3.7.2 All Solid-State Reference Electrodes 104 3.7.3 Eliminating the Inner Reference Electrode 105 3.7.4 Super-Hydrophobic Membranes 107 3.8 Ion Selective Field Effect Transistors (ISFETs) 108 3.9 Practical Considerations 111 3.9.1 Ionic Strength Buffers 111 3.9.2 Potential Drift 112 Problems 112 References 114 4. Applications of Ion Selective Electrodes 117 4.1 Overview 117 4.2 Case I. An Industrial Application 118 4.2.1 Will the Sample Concentrations Be Measurable? 118 4.2.2 Ionic Strength Adjustment Buffer 118 4.2.3 Sample Pretreatment 119 4.2.4 Salt Bridges 120 4.2.5 Calibration 122 4.2.6 Temperature Control 123 4.2.7 Signal Drift 124 4.2.8 Validating the Method 124 4.2.9 Standard Additions for Potentiometric Analysis 127 4.3 Case II. A Clinical Application 130 4.4 Case III. Environmental Applications 135 4.4.1 US EPA Method for Nitrate Determination by ISE 136 4.4.2 Field Measurements 139 4.5 Good Lab Practice for pH Electrode Use 142 4.5.1 Electrode Maintenance 142 4.5.2 Standard Buffers 143 4.5.3 Influence of Temperature on Cell Potentials 143 4.5.4 Calibration and Direct Sample Measurement 145 4.5.5 Evaluating the Response of a pH Electrode 145 4.5.6 Calibrating a Combination Electrode and pH Meter 147 4.5.7 Low Ionic Strength Samples 148 4.5.8 Samples Containing Soil, Food, Protein or Tris Buffer 148 4.5.9 pH Titrations 149 4.5.10 Gran Plots 149 Problems 151 References 153 5. Controlled Potential Methods 157 5.1 Overview 157 5.2 Similarities between Spectroscopy and Voltammetry 161 5.3 Current is a Measure of the Rate of the Overall Electrode Process 163 5.3.1 Rate of Electron Transfer 163 5.3.2 The Shape of the Current/Voltage Curve 167 5.3.3 Rate of Mass Transport 168 5.3.4 Electrochemical Reversibility 173 5.3.5 Voltammetry at Stationary Electrodes in Quiet Solutions 175 5.4 Methods for Avoiding Background Current 186 5.5 Working Electrodes 190 5.5.1 Mercury Electrodes 190 5.5.2 Solid Working Electrodes 191 5.5.3 Ultramicroelectrodes 199 5.5.4 Fast Scan CV 204 5.6 Pulse Amperometric Detection 207 5.7 Stripping Voltammetry 209 5.8 Special Applications of Amperometry 212 5.8.1 Flow-Through Detectors 212 5.8.2 Dissolved Oxygen Sensors 213 5.8.3 Enzyme Electrodes 215 5.8.4 Karl Fisher Method for Moisture Determination 218 5.9 Ion Transfer Voltammetry 222 Problems 230 References 235 6. Case Studies in Controlled Potential Methods 237 6.1 Overview 237 6.2 Case I. Evaluating the Formal Potential and Related Parameters 238 6.3 Case II. Evaluating Catalysts – Thermodynamic Considerations 242 6.4 Case III. Studying the Oxidation of Organic Molecules 246 6.5 Case IV. Evaluating Catalysts – Kinetic Studies 260 References 268 7. Instrumentation 269 7.1 Overview 269 7.2 A Brief Review of Passive Circuits 270 7.3 Operational Amplifiers 273 7.3.1 Properties of an Ideal Operational Amplifier 275 7.3.2 The Voltage Follower 275 7.3.3 Current Follower or Current-to-Voltage Converter 276 7.3.4 Inverter or Simple Gain Amplifier 277 7.3.5 A Potentiostat for a Three-Electrode Experiment 279 7.4 Noise and Shielding 280 7.5 Making Electrodes and Reference Bridges 283 7.5.1 Voltammetric Working Electrodes 283 7.5.2 Reference Electrodes 284 Problems 286 References 288 Appendix A Ionic Strength, Activity, and Activity Coefficients 289 Appendix B The Nicolsky–Eisenman Equation 293 Appendix C The Henderson Equation for Liquid Junction Potentials 297 Appendix D Standard Electrode Potentials for Some Selected Reduction Reactions 303 Appendix E The Nernst Equation from the Concept of Electrochemical Potential 307 Solutions to Problems 311 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnravels fundamental engineering for thetreatment, recovery, and disposal of solid waste, sludge and wastewater in the petroleum, chemical, and unconventional oil and gas processing industries This new edition unravels essential requirements for the process design and engineering of the equipment and facilities pertaining to waste management for gas refineries, chemical plants, oil terminals, and petrochemical plants. Updated throughout,Waste Management in the Chemical and Petroleum Industries, Second Editionoffers chapters on wastewater treatment; physical unit operations; chemical treatment; biological treatment; and wastewater treatment in unconventional oil and gas industries. It also covers wastewater sewer systems; sewage treatment; and solid waste treatment and disposal. New topics include: water pollution terminals the design procedure for effluent water pollution control spill prevention and controlTable of ContentsPreface xv About the Author xix 1 Wastewater Treatment 1 1.1 Characteristics of Wastewater 2 1.1.1 Wastewater Classifications 5 1.1.2 Water Pollution Terminals 5 1.1.3 Suspended Solids 6 1.1.4 Heavy Metals 6 1.1.5 Dissolved Inorganic Solids 7 1.1.6 Toxic Organic Compounds 7 1.1.7 Surfactants 7 1.1.8 Priority Pollutants 9 1.1.9 Volatile Organic Compounds 9 1.2 Treatment Stages 9 1.2.1 Sources of Wastewater 11 1.2.2 Discharge Options and Quality Requirements 11 1.3 Effluent Water Pollution Control 13 1.3.1 Spill Prevention and Control 14 1.3.2 Groundwater Pollution Control 16 1.4 Treatment Processes 18 1.4.1 Wastewater Pollution Oil Terminals 20 1.4.2 Simple Gravity Separation 21 1.4.3 Residual Suspended Matter 21 1.4.4 Selection of Treatment Processes 22 1.5 Siting and Design 24 1.5.1 Aquatic Ecosystems 25 1.5.2 Terrestrial Ecosystems 25 1.5.3 Wetland Ecosystems 27 1.5.4 Land Use 28 1.5.5 Water Pollution Control 28 1.6 Sources of Effluent in the Petrochemical Industry 29 1.6.1 Water Pollution 29 1.6.2 Cooling Water 29 1.6.3 Washing Water and Process Water 29 1.6.4 Typical Pollutants in the Petrochemical Industry 29 1.6.5 Petrochemical Waste Treatment 30 1.6.6 Fertilizer 31 1.7 Effect of Pollution 33 1.7.1 Major Pollutants 33 1.8 Olefin Plants 34 1.8.1 Polymeric Plants 35 1.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride Plants 36 1.8.3 Aromatic Plants 37 1.9 Environmental Protection for Industrial Waste 37 1.9.1 Important Factors in Process Selection 37 1.10 Chemical Oxygen Demand in Wastewater Systems 44 1.10.1 Determination of COD 44 1.10.2 Calculation of Theoretical Oxygen Demand 45 2 Physical Unit Operations 47 2.1 Flow Measurement 47 2.2 Screening 47 2.3 Comminution 50 2.4 Grit Removal 50 2.5 Gravity Separation 51 2.5.1 General 51 2.5.2 Application 52 2.5.3 Oil–Water Separators: General Design Considerations 53 2.5.4 Conventional, Rectangular Channel (API) Separators 53 2.5.5 Parallel-Plate Separators 65 2.5.6 Oil Traps 67 2.5.7 Oil Holding Basins 68 2.6 Flow Equalization 68 2.6.1 Application and Location 68 2.6.2 Volume Requirements 69 2.7 Mixing 70 2.7.1 Description and Type 70 2.7.2 Application 70 2.8 Sedimentation 71 2.8.1 Sedimentation Theory 71 2.8.2 Application and Type 73 2.8.3 Design Considerations 74 2.8.4 Number of Basins 75 2.8.5 Inlet Arrangements 75 2.8.6 Short-Circuiting 76 2.8.7 Outlet Arrangements 76 2.8.8 Detention Time 76 2.8.9 Surface Loading Rate 76 2.8.10 Factors Affecting Sedimentation 76 2.9 Dissolved Air Flotation 78 2.9.1 General 78 2.9.2 System Configuration 79 2.9.3 Variables Affecting DAF Efficiency 80 2.9.4 Treatability Testing 80 2.9.5 Design Considerations 81 2.9.6 Instruments and Control 86 2.9.7 Piping 86 2.9.8 Chemicals Facilities 87 2.9.9 Material 87 2.9.10 Estimation of Air Concentration in DAF Systems 87 2.10 Granular-Media Filters 93 2.10.1 General 93 2.10.2 Filter Types and Applications 94 2.10.3 System Design Parameters 96 2.10.4 Cycle Time 98 2.10.5 Vessels and Appurtenances 99 2.10.6 Instrumentation and Controls 100 3 Chemical Treatments 103 3.1 Introduction 103 3.1.1 Chemical Precipitation 103 3.1.2 Chemical Coagulation 103 3.1.3 Chemical Oxidation and Advanced Oxidation 104 3.1.4 Ion Exchange 104 3.1.5 Chemical Stabilization 106 3.2 Definition and Application 106 3.2.1 Activated Carbon Adsorption 106 3.3 Chemical Precipitation 109 3.4 Chemical Flocculation 109 3.4.1 Definition and Applications 110 3.4.2 Design Considerations 112 3.4.3 Clarifiers 112 3.4.4 Chemical Addition Systems 115 3.5 Disinfection 116 3.5.1 Chemical Agents 116 3.5.2 Mechanical Means of Disinfection 116 3.6 Chlorination 118 3.6.1 Chlorine Dosages 118 3.6.2 Design Considerations 119 3.7 Water Monitoring 120 3.7.1 Design Considerations for a Water Monitoring System 121 3.8 On-Site Portable Instruments for Water Pollution Control 121 3.8.1 Alternative Current Colorimeter 122 3.8.2 Online Fixed Measurement or Continuous Monitoring 122 3.8.3 Continuous Water Sampling and Clarification System 122 3.8.4 Laboratory Instruments 122 3.8.5 Soil Water Sampling 125 3.8.6 Groundwater Sampling 126 3.9 Physical Examination 126 3.9.1 Color 126 3.9.2 Conductivity 127 3.9.3 Turbidity 128 3.9.4 Determination of Metals 128 3.9.5 Polarography 128 3.9.6 Determination of Organic Constituents 129 3.9.7 Combustible Gas Indicator 130 3.9.8 Total Organic Carbon 130 3.9.9 Biochemical Oxygen Demand 131 3.9.10 Chemical Oxygen Demand 131 3.9.11 Examination of Water and Wastewater Radioactivity 131 3.10 Automated Laboratory Equipment for Monitoring Water and Wastewater 133 3.10.1 Loading Losses 133 3.10.2 Emissions to Water 134 4 Biological Treatments 137 4.1 Theory 137 4.1.1 Biological Activated Carbon Process 139 4.1.2 Biokinetic Theoretical Model 140 4.2 Biological Treatment Processes 142 4.2.1 Major Differences in Aerobic and Anaerobic Treatment 144 4.2.2 Aerobic Processes 146 4.2.3 Anaerobic Waste Treatment 149 4.2.4 Aerobic-Anaerobic (Facultative) Waste Treatment 149 4.3 Activated Sludge Units 150 4.3.1 Applications 151 4.3.2 Effects of Activated Sludge 151 4.3.3 Feed Composition 152 4.3.4 Process Design 157 4.3.5 Design Considerations 158 4.4 Trickling Filters 160 4.4.1 Trickling Filter Process Design 162 4.5 Rotating Biological Contactor System 163 4.6 Sewage Oxidation Ponds 164 5 Wastewater Treatment in the Unconventional Oil and Gas Industries 167 5.1 Background 167 5.1.1 Dissolved and Dispersed Hydrocarbon Components 169 5.1.2 Dissolved Minerals 169 5.1.3 Production Chemicals 169 5.1.4 Produced Solids 170 5.1.5 Dissolved Gases 170 5.2 Toxicity Limitations of Coal Bed Water 171 5.3 Shale Gas and CSG Produced Water: Treatment, and Disposal 174 5.3.1 Evaporation Ponds 174 5.3.2 Surface-Stream Disposal 174 5.3.3 Ion Exchange 176 5.3.4 Membrane Filtration Technology 176 5.3.5 Freeze-Thaw Evaporation 178 5.3.6 Adsorption 178 5.3.7 Chemical Oxidation 178 5.3.8 Filtration 179 5.3.9 Constructed Wetlands 179 5.3.10 Electrodialysis and Electrodialysis Reversal 179 5.3.11 Deep Well Injection at Dedicated Onshore Sites 180 5.3.12 Biological Aerated Filters 180 5.3.13 Macro-porous Polymer Extraction Technology 181 5.3.14 Thermal Technologies 181 5.4 Re-thinking Technologies for Safer Facing 185 5.5 Water Treatment for Oil Sands Mining 191 5.5.1 Recycling and Water Treatment Options 192 5.5.2 Oily Water Treatment in Oil Sands Mining 193 6 Wastewater Sewer Systems 199 6.1 Storm Water Sewer System 200 6.2 Oily Water Sewer System 200 6.3 Non-Oily Water Sewer System 201 6.4 Chemical Sewer System(s) 202 6.4.1 Disposal of Chemical Sewers 202 6.4.2 Neutralization Systems 202 6.4.3 Types of Chemical Waste 202 6.5 Sanitary Sewer System 203 6.6 Special Sewer Systems 203 6.7 Effluent Sources and Disposal 203 6.8 Particular Effluents in Refinery and Petrochemical Plants 205 6.8.1 Caustic Scrubs (Heavy Oils) 205 6.8.2 Desalter Wastewater 205 6.8.3 Foul or Sour Water 206 6.8.4 Spent Caustic Solutions 206 6.8.5 MTBE or Leaded Contaminated Streams 208 6.8.6 Benzene Contaminated Streams 208 6.8.7 Spent Sulfuric Acid Products 209 6.8.8 Nitrogen Base Components 210 6.8.9 Cyanides 210 6.8.10 Aluminum Chloride 210 6.8.11 Polyelectrolyte 210 6.8.12 Ferric Chloride 211 6.8.13 Phosphoric Acid 211 6.8.14 Hydrofluoric Acid 211 6.8.15 Other Spent Catalysts 211 6.8.16 Chemical Cleaning Waste 211 6.8.17 Sulfur Solidification and Crushing Facilities, and Loading Systems Drainage 211 6.8.18 Water Containing Solids, Emulsifying Agents, etc 212 6.8.19 Heavy Viscous Oils Drainage 212 6.8.20 Toxic Metal Contaminated Streams 212 6.8.21 Solvent Processes Drainage 212 6.8.22 Treating Processes Drainage 212 6.9 Petrochemical Plant Special Effluents 212 6.9.1 Summary of Disposal/Treatment Methods 213 6.10 NGL, LNG, and LPG Area Effluents 215 6.10.1 Liquefied Gas Spill 215 6.11 Gas Treatment Facilities Effluents 216 6.12 Effluents from Terminals, Depots, and Product Handling Areas 216 6.13 General Considerations and Conditions for Release of Waste 216 6.13.1 Characteristics and Composition of Waste 216 6.13.2 Characteristics of the Discharge Site and Receiving Environment 217 6.13.3 Availability of Waste Technologies 217 6.14 Effluent Wastewater Characteristics 218 6.14.1 Flow 218 6.14.2 Temperature 218 6.14.3 pH 218 6.14.4 Oxygen Demand 219 6.14.5 Phenol Content 219 6.14.6 Sulfide Content 219 6.14.7 Oil Content 220 6.14.8 Light Hydrocarbon Solubility in Water 220 6.14.9 Predicting the Mutual Solubility of Water–Hydrocarbon Systems 221 6.15 Wastewater Emissions 226 6.15.1 Point Source Discharge 226 6.15.2 Effluent Permissible Concentrations 228 6.16 Unsaturated Zone 232 6.17 Site Assessment 232 6.18 Gathering Release Information 233 7 Sewage Treatment 237 7.1 Sewage Effluents 238 7.1.1 Receiving Water 238 7.1.2 Final Effluents of Domestic Wastewater Plants 239 7.2 Methods of Sewage Treatment: General 239 7.2.1 Conventional Methods 239 7.3 Choice of System: General 239 7.4 Design of Sewage Treatment Plants: General Guidance 240 7.5 Design of Small Sewage Treatment Plants 240 7.5.1 Collection of Information 240 7.6 Preliminary Treatment 242 7.7 Primary and Secondary Settlement Tanks 242 7.7.1 Capacities of Primary Settlement Tanks 243 7.8 Sludge Digesters 244 7.9 Drying Beds 244 7.9.1 Secondary Settlement Tanks 245 7.10 Biological Filters 246 7.10.1 Distribution 247 7.10.2 Volume of Filter 247 7.10.3 Mineral Filter Media 247 7.11 Activated Sludge Units 248 7.12 Tertiary Treatment (Polishing) Processes 249 7.13 Disposal of Final Effluent 249 7.14 Advanced Wastewater Treatment 250 7.14.1 Effects of Chemical Constituents in Wastewater 250 7.14.2 Advanced Wastewater Treatment Operations and Processes 250 7.15 Effluent Disposal and Reuse 250 7.15.1 Direct and Indirect Reuse of Wastewater 250 8 Solid Waste Treatment and Disposal 257 8.1 Basic Considerations 257 8.1.1 Classification 257 8.1.2 Methodology 257 8.1.3 Sources 258 8.1.4 Characteristics 261 8.1.5 Quantities 261 8.2 Sludge Handling, Treatment, and Reuse 261 8.2.1 General 261 8.2.2 Sludge and Scum Pumping 264 8.2.3 Sludge Piping 268 8.2.4 Preliminary Operation Facilities 270 8.2.5 Thickening (Concentration) 272 8.3 Stabilization 274 8.3.1 Design Considerations 275 8.3.2 Lime Stabilization 275 8.3.3 Heat Treatment 275 8.3.4 Anaerobic Sludge Digestion 276 8.3.5 Composting 278 8.4 Conditioning 278 8.5 Disinfection 278 8.6 Dewatering 279 8.6.1 Sludge Dewatering Methods 279 8.6.2 Vacuum Filtration 279 8.6.3 Centrifugation 281 8.6.4 Belt Filter Press 282 8.6.5 Sludge Drying Beds 282 8.6.6 Lagoons 283 8.7 Heat Drying 283 8.8 Thermal Reduction 284 8.8.1 Thermal Reduction Process Applications 284 8.9 Land Application of Sludge 285 8.10 Chemical Fixation 286 8.11 Gathering Contaminant-Specific Information 286 8.12 Evaluating Contaminant Mobility 288 8.13 Technology Selection 288 8.13.1 Soil Venting 289 8.13.2 Biorestoration 289 8.13.3 Soil Flushing 289 8.13.4 Hydraulic Methods 290 8.13.5 Excavation 290 8.14 Saturated Zone 291 8.15 Site Assessment 291 8.15.1 Gathering Contaminant-Specific Information 291 8.15.2 Evaluating the Contaminant Phase in the Saturated Zone 292 8.16 Evaluating Contaminant Mobility 294 8.16.1 Mass of Dissolved and Sorbed Contaminants in Groundwater 294 8.16.2 Extent of Contaminant Plume 295 8.16.3 Mobility of Contamination in the Saturated Zone 296 8.17 Setting Remediation Goals 296 8.18 Technology Selection 296 8.19 Dissolved Contaminants 297 8.19.1 Trench Excavation 297 8.19.2 Pumping Well Installation 297 8.19.3 Recovery of Floating NAPL 298 8.19.4 Treatment of Contaminants Dissolved in Groundwater 298 8.20 Methodology for Pipeline Leak Consequence Evaluation 300 8.20.1 Evaluation of Leak 300 8.20.2 Potential Leak Rate and Leak Mass 302 8.20.3 Environmental Consequence Factor 304 8.21 Leak Detection Techniques 306 8.21.1 Balancing Mass Input Versus Output 307 8.21.2 Pressure and/or Flow Analysis 310 8.21.3 Monitoring of Characteristic Signals Generated by a Leak 310 8.21.4 Off-Line Leak Detection 311 8.22 Leakproof Control of Pipeline Gas Piping, Tanks, and Technological Installations Using Radioactive Tracers 312 8.22.1 Leak Detection in Liquid Pipelines 313 8.22.2 Leak Detection in Gas Pipelines 313 8.23 Final Sludge and Solids Conveyance, Storage, and Disposal 314 8.23.1 Conveyance Methods 315 8.23.2 Environmental Considerations in Sludge Transportation 315 8.23.3 Sludge Storage 315 8.23.4 Final Disposal 316 8.23.5 Incineration 317 8.23.6 Ash Handling and Disposal 318 8.24 Disposal of Solid Waste 318 8.24.1 Types of Waste 318 8.24.2 Siting of Hazardous Waste Facilities 319 8.24.3 Non-Hazardous Waste 320 8.24.4 Sources, Segregation, Quantities, and Characteristics of Solid Waste in Refineries 321 8.24.5 Source Reduction Methods 323 8.24.6 Resource Recovery and Waste Minimization 324 8.24.7 Hazardous Waste Reduction 328 8.24.8 Treatment Prior to Ultimate Disposal 330 8.24.9 Disposal of Waste Generated in Drilling Wells 336 8.24.10 General Sampling Considerations 337 8.24.11 Air Monitoring of Waste for Employee Protection 343 8.24.12 Procedures 344 8.24.13 Hazards 345 8.24.14 Quality Assurance Considerations 346 8.25 Emissions to Land 346 8.25.1 Groundwater Monitoring 346 8.25.2 Spills 347 8.26 Evaluation of Soil Infiltration Problems 348 8.26.1 Predictive Tool 348 8.26.2 Sample Calculations for Practice Engineers 351 Definitions and Terminology 353 Bibliography 383 Index 403

Read more less

Book SynopsisA text to the advances and development of novel technologies in the production of high-value products from economically viable raw materials Lignocellulosic Biorefining Technologiesis an essential guide to the most recent advances and developments of novel technologies in the production of various high-value products from economically viable raw materials. Written by a team of experts on the topic, the book covers important topics specifically on production of economical and sustainable products such as various biofuels, organic acids, enzymes, biopigments, biosurfactants, etc. The book highlights the important aspects of lignocellulosic biorefining including structure, function, and chemical composition of the plant cell wall and reviews the details about the various components present in the lignocellulosic biomass and their characterizations. The authors explore the various approaches available for processing lignocellulosic biomass into second generation sugars and focus on the Table of ContentsList of Contributors vii 1 Biorefining of Lignocellulose into Valuable Products 1Avinash P. Ingle, Anuj Kumar Chandel, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 2 Bulk and Specialty Chemicals from Plant Cell Wall Chemistry 7Luciana Ferrand, Florencia Vasco, and Juliana Gamboa‐Santos 3 Characterization of Lignocellulosic Biomass and Processing for Second-Generation Sugars Production 29Guadalupe Bustos Vázquez, Adrián Gonzalez Leos, Luis V. Rodríguez-Duran, and Rodolfo Torres de Los Santos 4 Production of Biohydrogen from Lignocellulosic Feedstocks 47Sheetal Radhakrishnan, Shiv Prasad, Sandeep Kumar, and Dhanya Subramanian 5 Recent Advances in the Production of Biodiesel Using Lignocellulosic Biomass 69Rahul Bhagat, Harris Panakkal, Indarchand Gupta, and Avinash P. Ingle 6 Bioelectricity Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass 87Samar Das, Shayaram Basumatary, Pankaj Kalita, Vinayak Kulkarni, Pranab Goswami, Akhil Garg, and Xiongbin Peng 7 Biopolymers from Lignocellulosic Biomass: Feedstocks, Production Processes, and Applications 125Grazielle Machado, Fernando Santos, Rogério Lourega, Jaqueline Mattia, Douglas Faria, Paulo Eichler, and Angenor Auler 8 Sustainable Production of Biosurfactants and Their Applications 159Paulo Ricardo Franco Marcelino, Fernanda Gonçalves, Itzcóatl Muñoz Jimenez, Bruna Curry Carneiro, Bruno Bosquiroli Santos, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 9 Lignocellulose as a Renewable Carbon Source for Microbial Synthesis of Different Enzymes 185Peyman Abdeshahian, Abudukeremu Kadier , Pankaj Kumar Rai, and Silvio Silvério da Silva 10 Production of Organic Acids Via Fermentation of Sugars Generated from Lignocellulosic Biomass 203Lourdes Zumalacárregui de Cárdenas and Beatriz Zumalacárregui de Cárdenas 11 Valorization of Lignin Into Value-Added Chemicals and Materials 247Ruly Teran Hilares, Lucas Ramos, Muhammad Ajaz Ahmed, Avinash P. Ingle, Anuj Kumar Chandel, Silvio Silvério da Silva, Jeon Woon Choi, and Julio Cesar dos Santos 12 Conversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass Through Pyrolysis to Promote a Sustainable Value Chain for Brazilian Agribusiness 265Genyr Kappler, Débora Machado de Souza, Carlos Alberto Mendes Moraes, Regina Célia Espinosa Modolo, Feliciane Andrade Brehm, Paulo Roberto Wander, and Luís António da Cruz Tarelho 13 Integrated Process of Biomass Thermochemical Conversion to Obtain Pyrolytic Sugars for Biofuels and Bioproducts 285Victor Haber Perez, Nathalia Ribeiro Ferreira da Silva, Euripedes Garcia Silveira Junior, Diego Cunha Rocha, Oselys Rodriguez Justo, Geraldo Ferreira David, Diana Catalina Cubides Roman, Valdemar Lacerda, Jr, and Manuel Garcia-Perez 14 Life Cycle Analysis of Lignocellulosic Conversion into Fuels, Energy, and Chemicals 313Mahdi Mazuchi 15 Technoeconomic Analysis of Biorefinery Processes for Biofuel and Other Important Products 333Harikishan R. Ellamla and Srinivas Appari Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides aspiring engineers with pertinent information and technological methodologies on how best to manage industry''s modern-day environment concerns This book explains why industrial environmental management is important to human environmental interactions and describes what the physical, economic, social, and technological constraints to achieving the goal of a sustainable environment are. It emphasizes recent progress in life-cycle sustainable design, applying green engineering principles and the concept of Zero Effect Zero Defect to minimize wastes and discharges from various manufacturing facilities. Its goal is to educate engineers on how to obtain an optimum balance between environmental protections, while allowing humans to maintain an acceptable quality of life. Industrial Environmental Management: Engineering, Science, and Policy covers topics such as industrial wastes, life cycle sustainable design, lean manufacturing, international environmTable of ContentsAbout the Author xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgements xxv About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Why Industrial Environmental Management? 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Environmental Management in Industries 3 1.3 Waste as Pollution 4 1.4 Defining Pollution Prevention 4 1.5 The ZDZE Paradigm 5 1.6 Zero Discharge Industries 5 1.7 Sustainability, Industrial Ecology, and Zero Discharge (Emissions) 6 1.8 Why Zero Discharge is Critical to Sustainability 8 1.9 The New Role of Process Engineers and Engineering Firms 9 1.10 Zero Discharge (Emissions) Methodology 10 1.11 Making the Transition 12 1.12 Constraints and Challenges 17 1.13 The Structure of the Book 18 Problems 21 References 22 2 Genesis of Environmental Problem Worldwide: International Environmental Regulations 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Genesis of the Environmental Problem 25 2.3 Causes of Pollution and Environmental Degradation 26 2.4 Industrialization and Urbanization in the United States 27 2.5 Important Technological Developments 33 2.6 Industrial Disasters 34 2.7 Environmental Law 39 2.8 Pollution Control Laws 39 2.9 Resource Sustainability 41 2.10 Polluter Pays Principle 42 2.11 Theory/Environmental Law Debate 42 2.12 International Law 43 2.13 The Legal and Regulatory Framework for Environmental Protection in India 47 2.14 United States Environmental Law 55 2.15 ISO 9000 and 14000 57 2.16 Current Environmental Regulatory Development in the United States: From End-of-Pipe Laws and Regulations to Pollution Prevention 60 2.17 Greenhouse Gases 60 Examples (Multiple Choice) 64 Problems 65 References 65 3 Industrial Pollution Sources, Its Characterization, Estimation, and Treatment 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Wastewater Sources 71 3.3 Wastewater Characteristics 71 3.4 Chemical Characteristics 73 3.5 Industrial Wastewater Variation 75 3.6 Industrial Wastestream Variables 77 3.7 Concentration vs. Mass of the Pollution 78 3.8 Industrial Wastewater Treatment 82 3.9 Air Quality 83 3.10 The Ideal Gas Law and Concentration Measurements in Gases 94 3.11 Other Applications of the Ideal Gas Law 96 3.12 Gas Flow Measurement 97 3.13 Flow at Standard Temperature and Pressure 98 3.14 Gas Flowrate Conversion from SCFM to ACFM 98 3.15 Corrections for Percent O2 98 3.16 Boiler Flue Gas Concentrations Are Usually Corrected to 3% Oxygen 98 3.17 Air‐to‐Fuel Ratio and Stoichiometric Ratio 98 3.18 Material Balances and Energy Balances 99 3.19 Wastes in the United States 102 3.20 Hazardous Waste 104 3.21 Incineration, Destruction, and WtE 105 3.22 Hazardous Waste Landfill (Sequestering, Isolation, etc.) 106 3.22.1 Pyrolysis 106 3.23 Radioactive Waste 106 3.24 Coal 107 3.25 Low‐ Level Waste 108 3.26 Nuclear Waste Management 109 Problems 110 References 111 4 Industrial Wastewater, Air Pollution, and Solid and Hazardous Wastes: Monitoring, Permitting, Sample Collections and Analyses, QA/QC, Compliance with State Regulations and Federal Standards 115 4.1 Introduction 115 4.2 Industrial Process Water 115 4.3 Common Elements, Radicals, and Chemicals in Water Analysis 115 4.4 Purposes and Objectives for Inspecting and Sampling 116 4.5 Sampling and QA/QC Plan 120 4.6 Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing 130 4.7 Flow Measurements 133 4.8 The Point of Compliance with the Water Quality Standards 139 4.9 Water Quality Modeling 142 4.10 Example NPDES Permits (for Refinery and Aluminum Smelter are shown in Section D.1) 145 4.11 Air Pollution Perspective 146 4.12 Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Permitting Process 149 4.13 An Overall Permitting Process 150 4.14 Best Available Control Technology 152 4.15 Atmospheric Dispersion Modeling 157 4.16 Dispersion Models: Indoor Concentrations 159 4.17 State Implementation Plan 162 4.18 Compliance 164 4.19 CAA Enforcement Provisions 168 4.20 Industrial Solid Wastes and Its Management 173 4.21 Hazardous Waste Landfill (Sequestering, Isolation, etc.) 180 4.22 Industrial Waste Generation Rates 181 4.23 Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act and Superfund 182 4.24 Industrial Waste Management in India: Shifting Gears 185 Problems 187 References 189 5 Assessment and Management of Health and Environmental Risks: Industrial and Manufacturing Process Safety 193 5.1 Health Risk Assessment 193 5.2 Assessing the Risks of Some Common Pollutants 201 5.3 Ecological Risk Assessment 207 5.4 Risk Management 217 5.5 Communicating Information on Environmental and Health Risks 227 5.6 Environmental Information Access on the Internet 231 5.7 Health and Occupational Safety 234 5.8 Industrial Process Safety System Guidelines 235 5.9 Industrial Hygiene 236 5.10 Atmospheric Hazards 237 5.11 Safety Equipment 241 5.12 Communication Devices 243 5.13 Noise 246 5.14 Radiation 249 5.15 Effects of Global Warming: Climate Change – The World’s Health 253 5.16 Key Vulnerabilities 257 5.17 Energy Sector 258 Problems 259 References 260 6 Industrial Process Pollution Prevention: Life-Cycle Assesvsment to Best Available Control Technology 265 6.1 Industrial Waste 265 6.2 What is Life Cycle Assessment? 267 6.3 LCA and LCI Software Tools 280 6.4 Evaluating the Life Cycle Environmental Performance of Chemical-, Mechanical-, and Bio-Pulping Processes 282 6.5 Evaluating the Life Cycle Environmental Performance of Two Disinfection Technologies 291 6.6 Case Study: LCA Comparisons of Electricity from Biorenewables and Fossil Fuels 299 6.7 Best Available Control Technology (for Environmental Remediation) 303 6.8 BACT: Applications to Gas Turbine Power Plants 304Problems 312 References 312 7 Economics of Manufacturing Pollution Prevention: Toward an Environmentally Sustainable Industrial Economy 317 7.1 Introduction 317 7.2 Economic Evaluation of Pollution Prevention 317 7.3 Cost Estimates 318 7.4 Economic Criteria for Technology Comparisons 321 7.5 Calculating CF 321 7.6 From Pollution Control to Profitable Pollution Prevention 323 7.7 Resource Recovery and Reuse 325 7.8 Profitable Pollution Prevention in the Metal-Finishing Industry 326 7.9 Use of Treated Municipal Wastewater as Power Plant Cooling System Makeup Water: Tertiary Treatment vs. Expanded Chemical Regimen for Recirculating Water Quality Management 335 7.10 Consequences of Dirty Air: Costs–Benefits 340 7.11 Some On-Going Pollution Prevention Technologies 341 7.12 Cost Indices and Estimating Cost of Equipment 348 7.13 Waste-to-Energy 350 7.14 Sustainable Economy and the Earth 354 Problems 357 References 359 8 Lean Manufacturing: Zero Defect and Zero Effect: Environmentally Conscious Manufacturing 363 8.1 Introduction 363 8.2 Engineering Data Summary and Presentation 364 8.3 Time Series: Process over Time 369 8.4 Process Capability 371 8.5 Lean Manufacturing 374 8.6 Types of Waste 380 8.7 Six Sigma in Industry 381 8.8 Lean Implementation Develops from TPS 381 8.9 Manufacturing System Characteristics: Process Planning Basics 385 8.10 Design for Life Cycle 386 8.11 Sustainable Design and Environmentally Conscious Design and Manufacturing 387 8.12 Lean Six Sigma 390 8.13 Six Sigma and Lean Manufacturing 392 8.14 Cost vs. Quality Analysis 393 8.15 Assessing and Reducing Risk in Design: Cost to Manufacturer 395 8.16 The Heart and Soul of the Toyota Way: Lean Processes 396 8.17 Essential Roles of Industrial Environmental Managers 400 8.18 Goals of IEMs 401 8.19 Environmental Compliance and Compliance Assurances 401 8.20 Waste Reduction 401 Problems 403 References 405 9 Industrial Waste Minimization Methodology: Industrial Ecology, Eco-Industrial Park and Manufacturing Process Intensification and Integration 409 9.1 Introduction 409 9.2 Industrial Ecology 409 9.3 Water–Energy Nexus 417 9.4 CE Indicators in Relation to Eco-Innovation 426 9.5 Process Intensification and Integration Potential in Manufacturing 427 9.6 Manufacturing Process Integration 432 9.7 New Sustainable Chemicals and Energy from Black Liquor Gasification Using Process Integration and Intensification 433 9.8 Chemical Recovery and Power/Steam Cogeneration at Pulp and Paper Mills 436 9.9 Conclusions 445 Problems 447 References 448 10 Quality Industrial Environmental Management: Sustainable Engineering in Manufacturing 453 10.1 Introduction: Industry and the Global Environmental Issues 453 10.2 Integrating LCA in Sustainable Product Design and Development 463 10.3 Green Chemistry: The Twelve Principles of Green Chemistry 464 10.4 The Hannover Principles 467 10.5 Sustainable Industries and Business 468 10.6 Six Essential Characteristics 470 10.7 Social Services 471 10.8 Environmental Regulatory Law: Command and Control Market Based, and Reflexive 471 10.9 Business Ethics 472 10.10 International Issues 473 10.11 Ethical Sustainability 473 10.12 Social Sustainability 474 10.13 Conclusions 475 10.14 Strategy for Corporate Sustainability 476 Problems 477 References 477 Appendix A Conversion Factors 481 Appendix B International Environmental Law 483 Appendix C Air Pollutant Emission Factors: Stationary Point and Area Sources 487 Appendix D Frequently Asked Questions and Answers: Water Quality Model, Dispersion Model and Permits 493 Appendix E Industrial Hygiene Outlines 511 Appendix F Environmental Cost-Benefit 513 Appendix G Resource Recovery: Waste-To-Energy Facility, City of Spokane, Washington, USA 515 Appendix H The Hannover Principles 519 Appendix I Environmental Goals and Business Goals Are Not Two Distinct Goal Sets 521 Appendix J Sample Codes of Ethics and Guidelines 523 Index 527

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 The Chemical Foundations of Biochemistry 1 Chemistry in Context 1 1.1 General Chemical Principles 2 1.2 Fundamental Concepts of Organic Chemistry 11 1.3 The Chemistry of Water 15 2 Nucleic Acids 26 Nucleic Acids in Context 26 2.1 Nucleic Acids Have Distinct Structures 27 2.2 Nucleic Acids Have Many Cellular Functions 37 2.3 The Manipulation of Nucleic Acids Has Transformed Biochemistry 45 3 Proteins I: An Introduction to Protein Structure and Function 67 Proteins in Context 67 3.1 Amino Acid Chemistry 69 3.2 Proteins Are Polymers of Amino Acids 74 3.3 Proteins Are Molecules of Defined Shape and Structure 79 3.4 Examples of Protein Structures and Functions 89 4 Proteins II: Enzymes 101 Enzymes in Context 101 4.1 Regarding Enzymes 103 4.2 Enzymes Increase Reaction Rate 108 4.3 The Mechanism of an Enzyme Can Be Deduced from Structural, Kinetic, and Spectral Data 117 4.4 Examples of Enzyme Regulation 127 5 Membranes and an Introduction to Signal Transduction 138 Biochemistry in Context 138 5.1 Membrane Structure and Function 139 5.2 Signal Transduction 149 6 Carbohydrates I: Mono- and Disaccharides, Glycolysis, Gluconeogenesis, and the Fates of Pyruvate 161 Carbohydrates in Context 161 6.1 Properties, Nomenclature, and Biological Functions of Monosaccharides 163 6.2 Properties, Nomenclature, and Biological Functions of Complex Carbohydrates 170 6.3 Glycolysis and an Introduction to Metabolic Pathways 177 6.4 Gluconeogenesis 193 6.5 The Fates of Pyruvate 196 7 The Common Catabolic Pathway: Citric Acid Cycle, the Electron Transport Chain, and ATP Biosynthesis 209 Electron Transport in Context 209 7.1 The Citric Acid Cycle 211 7.2 The Electron Transport Chain 223 7.3 ATP Biosynthesis 241 8 Carbohydrates II: Glycogen Metabolism, the Pentose Phosphate Pathway, Glycoconjugates, and Extracellular Matrices 253 Polysaccharides in Context 253 8.1 Glycogen Metabolism 255 8.2 The Pentose Phosphate Pathway 264 8.3 Carbohydrates in Glycoconjugates 273 8.4 Extracellular Matrices and Biofilms 284 9 Lipids I: Fatty Acids, Steroids, and Eicosanoids; Beta-Oxidation and Fatty Acid Biosynthesis 300 Lipids in Context 300 9.1 Properties, Nomenclature, and Biological Functions of Lipid Molecules 302 9.2 Fatty Acid Catabolism 311 9.3 Fatty Acid Biosynthesis 317 9.4 Ketone Body Metabolism 329 9.5 Steroid Metabolism 332 9.6 Eicosanoid and Endocannabinoid Metabolism 339 10 Lipids II: Metabolism and Transport of Complex Lipids 351 Complex Lipids in Context 351 10.1 Phospholipid Metabolism 353 10.2 Digestion of Triacylglycerols 361 10.3 Transport of Lipids in the Circulation 367 10.4 Entry of Lipids into the Cell 377 10.5 Neutral Lipid Biosynthesis 380 10.6 Lipid Storage Droplets, Fat Storage, and Mobilization 384 10.7 Lipid Rafts as a Biochemical Entity 388 11 Amino Acid and Amine Metabolism 397 Amine Metabolism in Context 397 11.1 Digestion of Proteins 399 11.2 Transamination and Oxidative Deamination 404 11.3 The Urea Cycle 409 11.4 Pathways of Amino Acid Carbon Skeleton Scavenging 414 11.5 The Detoxification of Other Amines and Xenobiotics 423 11.6 The Biochemistry of Renal Function 429 12 Regulation and Integration of Metabolism 440 Metabolism in Context 440 12.1 A Review of the Pathways and Crossroads of Metabolism 442 12.2 Organ Specialization and Metabolic States 446 12.3 Communication between Organs 455 12.4 Metabolic Disease 463 13 Nucleotide and Deoxynucleotide Metabolism 477 Nucleotides and Deoxynucleotides in Context 477 13.1 Purine Biosynthesis 478 13.2 Pyrimidine Biosynthesis 484 13.3 Deoxyribonucleotide Biosynthesis 489 13.4 Catabolism of Nucleotides 495 14 DNA Replication, Damage, and Repair 506 DNA in Context 506 14.1 Challenges of DNA Replication 507 14.2 DNA Replication in Prokaryotes 512 14.3 DNA Replication in Eukaryotes 517 14.4 DNA Damage and Repair 523 14.5 Homologous Recombination 534 15 RNA Synthesis and Processing 546 RNA Synthesis in Context 546 15.1 Transcription: RNA Synthesis 548 15.2 Processing of Nascent Eukaryotic RNA Messages 557 15.3 RNA Export from the Nucleus 566 16 Protein Synthesis 576 Protein Synthesis in Context 576 16.1 The Genetic Code 577 16.2 RNA Structure Function in Protein Biosynthesis 580 16.3 Protein Biosynthesis 585 17 Control and Regulation of Gene Expression 606 Gene Regulation in Context 606 17.1 DNA–Protein Interactions 607 17.2 Regulation of Expression in Prokaryotes 613 17.3 Regulation of Expression in Eukaryotes 623 18 Determination of Macromolecular Structure 649 Macromolecular Structure in Context 649 18.1 An Introduction to Structure Determination 650 18.2 Electron Microscopy 654 18.3 X-Ray Diffraction and Neutron Scattering 658 18.4 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 668 19 Allosterism and Receptor–Ligand Interactions 679 Allosterism in Context 679 19.1 Allosterism and Cooperativity 680 19.2 Hemoglobin 686 19.3 Receptor–Ligand Interactions 696 20 Designer Proteins and Protein Folding 706 Protein Engineering and Folding in Context 706 20.1 Protein Production 707 20.2 Protein Engineering 714 20.3 Protein Folding 724 21 Biomolecule Purification 736 Protein Purification in Context 736 21.1 Protein Purification Basics 737 21.2 Size-Exclusion Chromatography 745 21.3 Affinity Chromatography 751 22 Bioinformatics and Omics 764 Bioinformatics in Context 764 22.1 Introduction to Bioinformatics 765 22.2 Generating Bioinformatic Data 769 22.3 Analyzing Bioinformatic Data 778 23 Signal Transduction 790 Cell Signaling in Context 790 23.1 A Review of Signal Transduction 791 23.2 An Overview of Regulation of Signal Transduction 797 23.3 Six New Signal Transduction Pathways 800 24 Protein Trafficking 821 Protein Trafficking in Context 821 24.1 Molecular Aspects of Protein Trafficking 822 24.2 Molecular Motors 827 24.3 Vesicular Fusion 834 25 Photosynthesis and Nitrogen Fixation 841 Photosynthesis and Nitrogen Fixation in Context 841 25.1 Photosynthesis 842 25.2 Nitrogen Fixation 859 Techniques T-1 solutions A-1 Glossary G-1 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book gives a comprehensive explanation of what governs the breakage of extruded materials, and what techniques are used to measure it. The breakage during impact aka collision is explained using basic laws of nature allowing readers to determine the handling severity of catalyst manufacturing equipment and the severity of entire plants. This information can then be used to improve on the architecture of existing plants and how to design grass-roots plants. The book begins with a summary of particle forming techniques in the particle technology industry. It covers extrusion technology in more detail since extrusion is one of the workhorses for particle manufacture. A section is also dedicated on how to describe transport and chemical reaction in such particulates for of course their final use. It presents the fundamentals of the study of breakage by relating basic laws in different fields (mechanics and physics) and this leads to two novel dimensionless groups that govern breakaTable of ContentsAbout the Author ix Acknowledgments xi Foreword xiii 1 Catalyst Preparation Techniques and Equipment 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Forming of Catalysts 4 1.3 Impregnation and Drying 12 1.4 Rotary Calcination 13 1.5 From the Laboratory to a Commercial Plant 29 Nomenclature 29 References 30 2 Extrusion Technology 35 2.1 Background 35 2.2 Rheology 36 2.3 Extrusion 47 Nomenclature 57 References 59 3 The Aspect Ratio of an Extruded Catalyst: An In-depth Study 61 3.1 General 61 3.2 Introduction to Catalyst Strength and Catalyst Breakage 63 3.3 Mechanical Strength of Catalysts 67 3.4 Experimental Measurement of Mechanical Strength 76 3.5 Breakage by Collision 88 3.6 Breakage by Stress in a Fixed Bed 129 3.7 Breakage in Contiguous Equipment 145 3.8 Statistical Methods Applied to Manufacturing Materials 158 Nomenclature 159 Greek Symbols 161 Subscripts 162 References 162 4 Steady-state Diffusion and First-order Reaction in Catalyst Networks 165 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 Classic Continuum Approach 169 4.3 The Network Approach 171 Nomenclature 270 Greek Symbols 270 References 271 Appendix 4.1 Diffusion in a simple network 272 Appendix 4.2 Property of the semi-inverse 272 Appendix 4.3 Diffusion and reaction in a simple network 273 Appendix 4.4 Matrix properties for diffusion and reaction in a simple network 274 Appendix 4.5 Perturbation in a simple network 274 Appendix 4.6 A random variable 275 Appendix 4.7 Diffusion along a string of nodes 275 Appendix 4.8 Diffusion in a rectangular strip with an equal number of nodes 276 Appendix 4.9 Diffusion in a rectangular strip with an unequal number of nodes 277 Appendix 4.10 Diffusion and first-order reaction in a very deep network of 500 layers deep and five nodes per layer 279 Appendix 4.11 Diffusion and first-order reaction 280 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsChapter 1 – Electrons, Bonds, and Molecular Properties 1 Chapter 2 – Molecular Representations 27 Chapter 3 – Acids and Bases 69 Chapter 4 – Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 110 Chapter 5 – Stereoisomerism 141 Chapter 6 – Chemical Reactivity and Mechanisms 173 Chapter 7 – Alkyl Halides: Nucleophilic Substitution and Elimination Reactions 195 Chapter 8 – Addition Reactions of Alkenes 262 Chapter 9 – Alkynes 317 Chapter 10 – Radical Reactions 368 Chapter 11 – Synthesis 409 Chapter 12 – Alcohols and Phenols 449 Chapter 13 – Ethers and Epoxides; Thiols and Sulfides 510 Chapter 14 – Infrared Spectroscopy and Mass Spectrometry 563 Chapter 15 – Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 593 Chapter 16 – Conjugated Pi Systems and Pericyclic Reactions 639 Chapter 17 – Aromatic Compounds 682 Chapter 18 – Aromatic Substitution Reactions 717 Chapter 19 – Aldehydes and Ketones 790 Chapter 20 – Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives 865 Chapter 21 – Alpha Carbon Chemistry: Enols and Enolates 929 Chapter 22 – Amines 1010 Chapter 23 – Introduction to Organometallic Compounds 1071 Chapter 24 – Carbohydrates 1126 Chapter 25 – Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 1154 Chapter 26 – Lipids 1183 Chapter 27 – Synthetic Polymers 1202

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 A Review of General Chemistry: Electrons, Bonds, and Molecular Properties 1 1.1 Introduction to Organic Chemistry 2 1.2 The Structural Theory of Matter 3 1.3 Electrons, Bonds, and Lewis Structures 4 1.4 Identifying Formal Charges 7 1.5 Induction and Polar Covalent Bonds 8 1.6 Reading Bond-Line Structures 11 1.7 Atomic Orbitals 14 1.8 Valence Bond Theory 17 1.9 Molecular Orbital Theory 18 1.10 Hybridized Atomic Orbitals 20 1.11 Predicting Molecular Geometry: VSEPR Theory 26 1.12 Dipole Moments and Molecular Polarity 30 1.13 Intermolecular Forces and Physical Properties 33 WorldLinks Biomimicry and Gecko Feet 37 BioLinks Drug-Receptor Interactions 38 1.14 Solubility 39 BioLinks Propofol: The Importance of Drug Solubility 40 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 2 Molecular Representations 50 2.1 Molecular Representations 51 2.2 Drawing Bond-Line Structures 53 2.3 Identifying Functional Groups 55 BioLinks Marine Natural Products 56 2.4 Carbon Atoms with Formal Charges 58 2.5 Identifying Lone Pairs 58 2.6 Three-Dimensional Bond-Line Structures 61 BioLinks The Opioids 62 2.7 Introduction to Resonance 63 2.8 Curved Arrows 65 2.9 Formal Charges in Resonance Structures 68 2.10 Drawing Resonance Structures via Pattern Recognition 70 2.11 Assessing the Relative Importance of Resonance Structures 75 2.12 The Resonance Hybrid 79 2.13 Delocalized and Localized Lone Pairs 81 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 3 Acids and Bases 93 3.1 Introduction to Brønsted-Lowry Acids and Bases 94 3.2 Flow of Electron Density: Curved-Arrow Notation 94 BioLinks Antacids and Heartburn 96 3.3 Brønsted-Lowry Acidity: Comparing pKa values 97 BioLinks Drug Distribution and pKa 103 3.4 Brønsted-Lowry Acidity: Factors Affecting the Stability of Anions 104 3.5 Brønsted-Lowry Acidity: Assessing the Relative Acidity of Cationic Acids 115 3.6 Position of Equilibrium and Choice of Reagents 120 3.7 Leveling Effect 123 3.8 Solvating Effects 124 3.9 Counterions 125 WorldLinks Baking Soda versus Baking Powder 125 3.10 Lewis Acids and Bases 126 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 4 Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 138 4.1 Introduction to Alkanes 139 4.2 Nomenclature of Alkanes 139 WorldLinks Pheromones: Chemical Messengers 143 BioLinks Naming Drugs 151 4.3 Constitutional Isomers of Alkanes 152 4.4 Relative Stability of Isomeric Alkanes 153 4.5 Sources and Uses of Alkanes 154 WorldLinks An Introduction to Polymers 156 4.6 Drawing Newman Projections 156 4.7 Conformational Analysis of Ethane and Propane 158 4.8 Conformational Analysis of Butane 160 BioLinks Drugs and Their Conformations 164 4.9 Cycloalkanes 164 BioLinks Cyclopropane as an Inhalation Anesthetic 166 4.10 Conformations of Cyclohexane 167 4.11 Drawing Chair Conformations 168 4.12 Monosubstituted Cyclohexane 170 4.13 Disubstituted Cyclohexane 172 4.14 cis-trans Stereoisomerism 176 4.15 Polycyclic Systems 177 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 5 Stereoisomerism 188 5.1 Overview of Isomerism 189 5.2 Introduction to Stereoisomerism 190 WorldLinks The Sense of Smell 195 5.3 Designating Configuration Using the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog System 195 BioLinks Chiral Drugs 200 5.4 Optical Activity 201 5.5 Stereoisomeric Relationships: Enantiomers and Diastereomers 207 5.6 Symmetry and Chirality 210 5.7 Fischer Projections 214 5.8 Conformationally Mobile Systems 216 5.9 Chiral Compounds that Lack a Chiral Center 217 5.10 Resolution of Enantiomers 218 5.11 E and Z Designations for Diastereomeric Alkenes 220 BioLinks Phototherapy Treatment for Neonatal Jaundice 222 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 6 Chemical Reactivity and Mechanisms 233 6.1 Enthalpy 234 6.2 Entropy 237 6.3 Gibbs Free Energy 239 WorldLinks Explosives 240 WorldLinks Do Living Organisms Violate the Second Law of Thermodynamics? 242 6.4 Equilibria 242 6.5 Kinetics 244 BioLinks Nitroglycerin: An Explosive with Medicinal Properties 247 WorldLinks Beer Making 248 6.6 Reading Energy Diagrams 249 6.7 Nucleophiles and Electrophiles 252 6.8 Mechanisms and Arrow Pushing 256 6.9 Combining the Patterns of Arrow Pushing 261 6.10 Drawing Curved Arrows 263 6.11 Carbocation Rearrangements 266 6.12 Reversible and Irreversible Reaction Arrows 268 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 7 Alkyl Halides: Nucleophilic Substitution and Elimination Reactions 280 7.1 Introduction to Substitution and Elimination Reactions 281 7.2 Nomenclature and Uses of Alkyl Halides 282 7.3 SN2 Reactions 286 BioLinks Pharmacology and Drug Design 292 7.4 Nucleophilic Strength in SN2 Reactions 294 BioLinks SN2 Reactions in Biological Systems—Methylation 295 7.5 Introduction to E2 Reactions 296 7.6 Stability of Alkenes and Cycloalkenes 299 7.7 Regiochemical and Stereochemical Outcomes for E2 Reactions 301 7.8 Unimolecular Reactions (SN1 and E1) 311 7.9 Predicting Products: Substitution vs. Elimination 320 7.10 Substitution and Elimination Reactions with Other Substrates 327 7.11 Synthesis Strategies 331 BioLinks Radiolabeled Compounds in Diagnostic Medicine 338 7.12 Solvent Effects in Substitution Reactions 339 SpecialTopic Kinetic Isotope Effects 343 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) • Integrated Problems Challenge Problems 8 Addition Reactions of Alkenes 356 8.1 Introduction to Addition Reactions 357 8.2 Alkenes in Nature and in Industry 358 WorldLinks Pheromones to Control Insect Populations 358 8.3 Nomenclature of Alkenes 359 8.4 Addition vs. Elimination: A Thermodynamic Perspective 361 8.5 Hydrohalogenation 363 WorldLinks Cationic Polymerization and Polystyrene 370 8.6 Acid-Catalyzed Hydration 371 8.7 Oxymercuration-Demercuration 375 8.8 Hydroboration-Oxidation 376 8.9 Catalytic Hydrogenation 382 WorldLinks Partially Hydrogenated Fats and Oils 387 8.10 Halogenation and Halohydrin Formation 388 8.11 Anti Dihydroxylation 392 8.12 Syn Dihydroxylation 395 8.13 Oxidative Cleavage 396 8.14 Predicting the Products of an Addition Reaction 398 8.15 Synthesis Strategies 400 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 9 Alkynes 417 9.1 Introduction to Alkynes 418 BioLinks The Role of Molecular Rigidity 420 WorldLinks Conducting Organic Polymers 421 9.2 Nomenclature of Alkynes 421 9.3 Acidity of Acetylene and Terminal Alkynes 423 9.4 Preparation of Alkynes 426 9.5 Reduction of Alkynes 428 9.6 Hydrohalogenation of Alkynes 431 9.7 Hydration of Alkynes 433 9.8 Halogenation of Alkynes 439 9.9 Ozonolysis of Alkynes 439 9.10 Alkylation of Terminal Alkynes 440 9.11 Synthesis Strategies 442 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 10 Radical Reactions 454 10.1 Radicals 455 10.2 Common Patterns in Radical Mechanisms 460 10.3 Chlorination of Methane 463 10.4 Thermodynamic Considerations for Halogenation Reactions 467 10.5 Selectivity of Halogenation 469 10.6 Stereochemistry of Halogenation 472 10.7 Allylic Bromination 474 10.8 Atmospheric Chemistry and the Ozone Layer 477 WorldLinks Fighting Fires with Chemicals 479 10.9 Autooxidation and Antioxidants 480 BioLinks Why is an Overdose of Acetaminophen Fatal? 482 10.10 Radical Addition of HBr: Anti-Markovnikov Addition 483 10.11 Radical Polymerization 487 10.12 Radical Processes in the Petrochemical Industry 489 10.13 Halogenation as a Synthetic Technique 489 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 11 Synthesis 499 11.1 One-Step Syntheses 500 11.2 Functional Group Transformations 501 11.3 Reactions That Change the Carbon Skeleton 505 BioLinks Vitamins 507 11.4 How to Approach a Synthesis Problem 508 BioLinks The Total Synthesis of Vitamin B12 512 11.5 Multi-step Synthesis and Retrosynthetic Analysis 514 WorldLinks Retrosynthetic Analysis 519 11.6 Green Chemistry 519 11.7 Practical Tips for Increasing Proficiency 520 BioLinks Total Synthesis of Taxol 521 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 12 Alcohols and Phenols 529 12.1 Structure and Properties of Alcohols 530 BioLinks Chain Length as a Factor in Drug Design 534 12.2 Acidity of Alcohols and Phenols 535 12.3 Preparation of Alcohols via Substitution or Addition 538 12.4 Preparation of Alcohols via Reduction 539 12.5 Preparation of Diols 546 WorldLinks Antifreeze 547 12.6 Preparation of Alcohols via Grignard Reagents 547 12.7 Protection of Alcohols 552 12.8 Preparation of Phenols 553 12.9 Reactions of Alcohols: Substitution and Elimination 554 BioLinks Drug Metabolism 557 12.10 Reactions of Alcohols: Oxidation 559 12.11 Biological Redox Reactions 563 BioLinks Biological Oxidation of Methanol and Ethanol 565 12.12 Oxidation of Phenol 565 12.13 Synthesis Strategies 567 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 13 Ethers and Epoxides; Thiols and Sulfides 585 13.1 Introduction to Ethers 586 13.2 Nomenclature of Ethers 586 13.3 Structure and Properties of Ethers 588 BioLinks Ethers as Inhalation Anesthetics 589 13.4 Crown Ethers 590 WorldLinks Chelating Agents in the Food Industry and in Medicine 592 13.5 Preparation of Ethers 593 13.6 Reactions of Ethers 596 13.7 Nomenclature of Epoxides 599 BioLinks Epothilones as Novel Anticancer Agents 600 13.8 Preparation of Epoxides 600 BioLinks Active Metabolites and Drug Interactions 603 13.9 Enantioselective Epoxidation 603 13.10 Ring-Opening Reactions of Epoxides 605 WorldLinks Ethylene Oxide as a Sterilizing Agent for Sensitive Medical Equipment 608 BioLinks Cigarette Smoke and Carcinogenic Epoxides 612 13.11 Thiols and Sulfides 613 13.12 Synthesis Strategies Involving Epoxides 617 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 14 Infrared Spectroscopy and Mass Spectrometry 636 14.1 Introduction to Spectroscopy 637 WorldLinks Microwave Ovens 639 14.2 IR Spectroscopy 639 BioLinks IR Thermal Imaging for Cancer Detection 640 14.3 Signal Characteristics: Wavenumber 641 14.4 Signal Characteristics: Intensity 646 WorldLinks IR Spectroscopy for Testing Blood Alcohol Levels 648 14.5 Signal Characteristics: Shape 648 14.6 Analyzing an IR Spectrum 652 14.7 Using IR Spectroscopy to Distinguish between Two Compounds 657 14.8 Introduction to Mass Spectrometry 658 WorldLinks Mass Spectrometry for Detecting Explosives 660 14.9 Analyzing the (M)+• Peak 661 14.10 Analyzing the (M+1)+• Peak 662 14.11 Analyzing the (M+2)+• Peak 664 14.12 Analyzing the Fragments 665 14.13 High-Resolution Mass Spectrometry 668 14.14 Gas Chromatography–Mass Spectrometry 670 14.15 Mass Spectrometry of Large Biomolecules 671 BioLinks Medical Applications of Mass Spectrometry 671 14.16 Hydrogen Deficiency Index: Degrees of Unsaturation 672 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 15 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 684 15.1 Introduction to NMR Spectroscopy 685 15.2 Acquiring a 1H NMR Spectrum 687 15.3 Characteristics of a 1H NMR Spectrum 688 15.4 Number of Signals 689 15.5 Chemical Shift 695 15.6 Integration 702 15.7 Multiplicity 705 15.8 Drawing the Expected 1H NMR Spectrum of a Compound 713 15.9 Using 1H NMR Spectroscopy to Distinguish between Compounds 715 BioLinks Detection of Impurities in Heparin Sodium Using 1H NMR Spectroscopy 717 15.10 Analyzing a 1H NMR Spectrum 718 15.11 Acquiring a 13C NMR Spectrum 721 15.12 Chemical Shifts in 13C NMR Spectroscopy 721 15.13 DEPT 13C NMR Spectroscopy 724 BioLinks Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) 727 Review of Concepts & Vocabulary • SkillBuilder Review Practice Problems • ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 16 Conjugated Pi Systems and Pericyclic Reactions 738 16.1 Classes of Dienes 739 16.2 Conjugated Dienes 740 16.3 Molecular Orbital Theory 742 16.4 Electrophilic Addition 746 16.5 Thermodynamic Control vs. Kinetic Control 749 WorldLinks Natural and Synthetic Rubbers 752 16.6 An Introduction to Pericyclic Reactions 753 16.7 Diels–Alder Reactions 754 16.8 MO Description of Cycloadditions 760 16.9 Electrocyclic Reactions 763 16.10 Sigmatropic Rearrangements 768 BioLinks The Photoinduced Biosynthesis of Vitamin D 770 16.11 UV-Vis Spectroscopy 771 WorldLinks Sunscreens 775 16.12 Color 776 WorldLinks Bleach 777 16.13 Chemistry of Vision 777 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 17 Aromatic Compounds 788 17.1 Introduction to Aromatic Compounds 789 WorldLinks What is Coal? 790 17.2 Nomenclature of Benzene Derivatives 790 17.3 Structure of Benzene 793 17.4 Stability of Benzene 794 WorldLinks Molecular Cages 798 17.5 Aromatic Compounds Other Than Benzene 801 BioLinks The Development of Nonsedating Antihistamines 806 17.6 Reactions at the Benzylic Position 808 17.7 Reduction of Benzene and Its Derivatives 813 17.8 Spectroscopy of Aromatic Compounds 815 WorldLinks Buckyballs and Nanotubes 818 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 18 Aromatic Substitution Reactions 828 18.1 Introduction to Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution 829 18.2 Halogenation 829 BioLinks Halogenation in Drug Design 832 18.3 Sulfonation 833 WorldLinks What Are Those Colors in Fruity Pebbles? 834 18.4 Nitration 835 BioLinks The Discovery of Prodrugs 837 18.5 Friedel–Crafts Alkylation 838 18.6 Friedel–Crafts Acylation 840 18.7 Activating Groups 842 18.8 Deactivating Groups 846 18.9 Halogens: The Exception 848 18.10 Determining the Directing Effects of a Substituent 850 18.11 Multiple Substituents 853 18.12 Synthesis Strategies 859 18.13 Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution 866 18.14 Elimination-Addition 868 18.15 Identifying the Mechanism of an Aromatic Substitution Reaction 870 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 19 Aldehydes and Ketones 884 19.1 Introduction to Aldehydes and Ketones 885 19.2 Nomenclature 886 19.3 Preparing Aldehydes and Ketones: A Review 888 19.4 Introduction to Nucleophilic Addition Reactions 889 19.5 Oxygen Nucleophiles 892 BioLinks Acetals as Prodrugs 898 19.6 Nitrogen Nucleophiles 900 WorldLinks Beta-Carotene and Vision 904 19.7 Hydrolysis of Acetals, Imines, and Enamines 908 BioLinks Prodrugs 911 19.8 Sulfur Nucleophiles 911 19.9 Hydrogen Nucleophiles 912 19.10 Carbon Nucleophiles 913 WorldLinks Organic Cyanide Compounds in Nature 916 19.11 Baeyer–Villiger Oxidation of Aldehydes and Ketones 921 19.12 Synthesis Strategies 922 19.13 Spectroscopic Analysis of Aldehydes and Ketones 925 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 20 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives 938 20.1 Introduction to Carboxylic Acids 939 20.2 Nomenclature of Carboxylic Acids 939 20.3 Structure and Properties of Carboxylic Acids 941 20.4 Preparation of Carboxylic Acids 944 20.5 Reactions of Carboxylic Acids 945 20.6 Introduction to Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 946 BioLinks Sedatives 948 20.7 Reactivity of Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 950 20.8 Preparation and Reactions of Acid Chlorides 957 20.9 Preparation and Reactions of Acid Anhydrides 962 BioLinks How Does Aspirin Work? 964 20.10 Preparation of Esters 965 20.11 Reactions of Esters 966 WorldLinks How Soap is Made 967 BioLinks Esters as Prodrugs 968 20.12 Preparation and Reactions of Amides 971 WorldLinks Polyesters and Polyamides 972 BioLinks Beta-Lactam Antibiotics 975 20.13 Preparation and Reactions of Nitriles 976 20.14 Synthesis Strategies 979 20.15 Spectroscopy of Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives 984 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 21 Alpha Carbon Chemistry: Enols and Enolates 996 21.1 Introduction to Alpha Carbon Chemistry: Enols and Enolates 997 21.2 Alpha Halogenation of Enols and Enolates 1004 21.3 Aldol Reactions 1009 WorldLinks Muscle Power 1012 21.4 Claisen Condensations 1020 21.5 Alkylation of the Alpha Position 1022 21.6 Conjugate Addition Reactions 1031 BioLinks Glutathione Conjugation and Biological Michael Reactions 1033 21.7 Synthesis Strategies 1037 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 22 Amines 1054 22.1 Introduction to Amines 1055 BioLinks Drug Metabolism Studies 1056 22.2 Nomenclature of Amines 1056 22.3 Properties of Amines 1059 BioLinks Fortunate Side Effects 1060 WorldLinks Chemical Warfare Among Ants 1064 22.4 Preparation of Amines: A Review 1065 22.5 Preparation of Amines via Substitution Reactions 1066 22.6 Preparation of Amines via Reductive Amination 1069 22.7 Synthesis Strategies 1071 22.8 Acylation of Amines 1074 22.9 Hofmann Elimination 1075 22.10 Reactions of Amines with Nitrous Acid 1078 22.11 Reactions of Aryl Diazonium Ions 1080 22.12 Nitrogen Heterocycles 1084 BioLinks H2-Receptor Antagonists and the Development of Cimetidine 1085 22.13 Spectroscopy of Amines 1087 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 23 Introduction to Organometallic Compounds 1100 23.1 General Properties of Organometallic Compounds 1101 23.2 Organolithium and Organomagnesium Compounds 1102 23.3 Lithium Dialkyl Cuprates (Gilman Reagents) 1105 23.4 The Simmons–Smith Reaction and Carbenoids 1109 23.5 Stille Coupling 1112 23.6 Suzuki Coupling 1117 23.7 Negishi Coupling 1123 23.8 The Heck Reaction 1128 23.9 Alkene Metathesis 1133 WorldLinks Improving Biodiesel via Alkene Metathesis 1138 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems EduardHarkonen/iStock/Getty Images 24 Carbohydrates 1153 24.1 Introduction to Carbohydrates 1154 24.2 Classification of Monosaccharides 1154 24.3 Configuration of Aldoses 1157 24.4 Configuration of Ketoses 1158 24.5 Cyclic Structures of Monosaccharides 1160 24.6 Reactions of Monosaccharides 1167 24.7 Disaccharides 1174 BioLinks Lactose Intolerance 1177 WorldLinks Artificial Sweeteners 1178 24.8 Polysaccharides 1179 24.9 Amino Sugars 1180 24.10 N-Glycosides 1181 BioLinks Aminoglycoside Antibiotics 1182 BioLinks Erythromycin Biosynthesis 1186 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 25 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 1194 25.1 Introduction to Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 1195 25.2 Structure and Properties of Amino Acids 1196 WorldLinks Nutrition and Sources of Amino Acids 1198 WorldLinks Forensic Chemistry and Fingerprint Detection 1202 25.3 Amino Acid Synthesis 1203 25.4 Structure of Peptides 1207 BioLinks Polypeptide Antibiotics 1212 25.5 Sequencing a Peptide 1213 25.6 Peptide Synthesis 1216 25.7 Protein Structure 1224 BioLinks Diseases Caused by Misfolded Proteins 1227 25.8 Protein Function 1227 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 26 Lipids 1238 26.1 Introduction to Lipids 1239 26.2 Waxes 1240 26.3 Triglycerides 1241 26.4 Reactions of Triglycerides 1244 WorldLinks Soaps Versus Synthetic Detergents 1249 26.5 Phospholipids 1253 BioLinks Polyether Antibiotics 1256 26.6 Steroids 1257 BioLinks Cholesterol and Heart Disease 1260 BioLinks Anabolic Steroids and Competitive Sports 1263 26.7 Prostaglandins 1263 BioLinks NSAIDs and COX-2 Inhibitors 1265 26.8 Terpenes 1266 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems 27 Synthetic Polymers 1277 27.1 Introduction to Synthetic Polymers 1278 27.2 Nomenclature of Synthetic Polymers 1279 27.3 Copolymers 1280 27.4 Polymer Classification by Reaction Type 1281 27.5 Polymer Classification by Mode of Assembly 1289 27.6 Polymer Classification by Structure 1291 27.7 Polymer Classification by Properties 1294 WorldLinks Safety Glass and Car Windshields 1295 27.8 Polymer Recycling 1296 Review of Reactions • Review of Concepts & Vocabulary SkillBuilder Review • Practice Problems ACS-Style Problems (Multiple Choice) Integrated Problems • Challenge Problems Appendix: Nomenclature of Polyfunctional Compounds A–1 Selected Answers ANS–1 Glossary G–1 Index I–1

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xiv Part 1 Foundations 1 The Chemical Basis of Life 1 1.1 What Is Biochemistry? 1 1.2 Biological Molecules 3 Cells contain four major types of biomolecules 3 There are three major kinds of biological polymers 6 Box 1.A Units Used in Biochemistry 7 1.3 Energy and Metabolism 10 Enthalpy and entropy are components of free energy 11 ΔG is less than zero for a spontaneous process 12 Life is thermodynamically possible 12 1.4 The Origin of Cells 14 Prebiotic evolution led to cells 15 Box 1.B How Does Evolution Work? 17 Eukaryotes are more complex than prokaryotes 17 The human body includes microorganisms 19 2 Aqueous Chemistry 27 2.1 Water Molecules and Hydrogen Bonds 27 Hydrogen bonds are one type of electrostatic force 29 Water dissolves many compounds 31 Box 2.A Why Do Some Drugs Contain Fluorine? 31 2.2 The Hydrophobic Effect 33 Amphiphilic molecules experience both hydrophilic interactions and the hydrophobic effect 35 The hydrophobic core of a lipid bilayer is a barrier to diffusion 35 Box 2.B Sweat, Exercise, and Sports Drinks 36 2.3 Acid–Base Chemistry 37 [H+] and [OH–] are inversely related 38 The pH of a solution can be altered 39 Box 2.C Atmospheric CO2 and Ocean Acidification 39 A pK value describes an acid’s tendency to ionize 40 The pH of a solution of acid is related to the pK 41 2.4 Tools and Techniques: Buffers 44 2.5 Clinical Connection: Acid–Base Balance in Humans 46 Part 2 Molecular Structure and Function 3 Nucleic Acid Structure and Function 57 3.1 Nucleotides 57 Nucleic acids are polymers of nucleotides 58 Some nucleotides have other functions 60 3.2 Nucleic Acid Structure 61 DNA is a double helix 62 RNA is single-stranded 64 Nucleic acids can be denatured and renatured 64 3.3 The Central Dogma 67 Box 3.A Replication, Mitosis, Meiosis, and Mendel’s Laws 67 DNA must be decoded 70 A mutated gene can cause disease 71 Genes can be altered 72 Box 3.B Genetically Modified Organisms 73 3.4 Genomics 74 The exact number of human genes is not known 75 Genome size varies 75 Genomics has practical applications 77 Box 3.C Viruses 78 4 Protein Structure 86 4.1 Amino Acids, the Building Blocks of Proteins 86 The 20 amino acids have different chemical properties 88 Box 4.A Does Chirality Matter? 89 Box 4.B Monosodium Glutamate 91 Peptide bonds link amino acids in proteins 91 The amino acid sequence is the first level of protein structure 94 4.2 Secondary Structure: The Conformation of the Peptide Group 95 The α helix exhibits a twisted backbone conformation 96 The β sheet contains multiple polypeptide strands 96 Proteins also contain irregular secondary structure 98 4.3 Tertiary Structure and Protein Stability 99 Proteins can be described in different ways 99 Globular proteins have a hydrophobic core 100 Protein structures are stabilized mainly by the hydrophobic effect 101 Box 4.C Thioester Bonds as Spring-Loaded Traps 103 Protein folding is a dynamic process 103 Box 4.D Baking and Gluten Denaturation 104 Disorder is a feature of many proteins 105 Protein functions may depend on disordered regions 106 4.4 Quaternary Structure 107 4.5 Clinical Connection: Protein Misfolding and Disease 109 4.6 Tools and Techniques: Analyzing Protein Structure 111 Chromatography takes advantage of a polypeptide’s unique properties 111 Mass spectrometry reveals amino acid sequences 114 Box 4.E Mass Spectrometry Applications 116 Protein structures are determined by NMR spectroscopy, X-ray crystallography, and cryo-electron microscopy 116 5 Protein Function 125 5.1 Myoglobin and Hemoglobin: Oxygen-Binding Proteins 126 Oxygen binding to myoglobin depends on the oxygen concentration 127 Myoglobin and hemoglobin are related by evolution 128 Oxygen binds cooperatively to hemoglobin 129 A conformational shift explains hemoglobin’s cooperative behavior 130 Box 5.A Carbon Monoxide Poisoning 130 H+ ions and bisphosphoglycerate regulate oxygen binding to hemoglobin in vivo 132 5.2 Clinical Connection: Hemoglobin Variants 134 5.3 Structural Proteins 136 Actin filaments are most abundant 137 Actin filaments continuously extend and retract 138 Tubulin forms hollow microtubules 139 Keratin is an intermediate filament 142 Collagen is a triple helix 144 Box 5.B Vitamin C Deficiency Causes Scurvy 144 Collagen molecules are covalently cross-linked 145 Box 5.C Bone and Collagen Defects 147 5.4 Motor Proteins 148 Myosin has two heads and a long tail 148 Myosin operates through a lever mechanism 150 Kinesin is a microtubule-associated motor protein 151 Box 5.D Myosin Mutations and Deafness 151 Kinesin is a processive motor 152 5.5 Antibodies 154 Immunoglobulin G includes two antigen-binding sites 154 B lymphocytes produce diverse antibodies 156 Researchers take advantage of antibodies’ affinity and specificity 157 6 How Enzymes Work 167 6.1 What Is an Enzyme? 167 Enzymes are usually named after the reaction they catalyze 170 6.2 Chemical Catalytic Mechanisms 171 A catalyst provides a reaction pathway with a lower activation energy barrier 173 Enzymes use chemical catalytic mechanisms 173 Box 6.A Depicting Reaction Mechanisms 175 The catalytic triad of chymotrypsin promotes peptide bond hydrolysis 177 6.3 Unique Properties of Enzyme Catalysts 180 Enzymes stabilize the transition state 180 Efficient catalysis depends on proximity and orientation effects 181 The active-site microenvironment promotes catalysis 182 6.4 Chymotrypsin in Context 183 Not all serine proteases are related by evolution 183 Enzymes with similar mechanisms exhibit different substrate specificity 184 Chymotrypsin is activated by proteolysis 185 Protease inhibitors limit protease activity 186 6.5 Clinical Connection: Blood Coagulation 187 7 Enzyme Kinetics and Inhibition 198 7.1 Introduction to Enzyme Kinetics 198 7.2 Derivation and Meaning of the Michaelis–Menten Equation 201 Rate equations describe chemical processes 201 The Michaelis–Menten equation is a rate equation for an enzyme-catalyzed reaction 202 KM is the substrate concentration at which velocity is half-maximal 204 The catalytic constant describes how quickly an enzyme can act 204 kcat/KM indicates catalytic efficiency 205 KM and Vmax are experimentally determined 205 Not all enzymes fit the simple Michaelis–Menten model 207 7.3 Enzyme Inhibition 209 Some inhibitors act irreversibly 209 Competitive inhibition is the most common form of reversible enzyme inhibition 210 Transition state analogs inhibit enzymes 212 Other types of inhibitors affect Vmax 213 Box 7.A Inhibitors of HIV Protease 214 Allosteric enzyme regulation includes inhibition and activation 216 Several factors may influence enzyme activity 219 7.4 Clinical Connection: Drug Development 219 8 Lipids and Membranes 234 8.1 Lipids 234 Fatty acids contain long hydrocarbon chains 235 Box 8.A Omega-3 Fatty Acids 236 Some lipids contain polar head groups 237 Lipids perform a variety of physiological functions 239 Box 8.B The Lipid Vitamins A, D, E, and K 240 8.2 The Lipid Bilayer 241 The bilayer is a fluid structure 242 Natural bilayers are asymmetric 243 8.3 Membrane Proteins 244 Integral membrane proteins span the bilayer 245 An α helix can cross the bilayer 245 A transmembrane β sheet forms a barrel 246 Lipid-linked proteins are anchored in the membrane 246 8.4 The Fluid Mosaic Model 248 Membrane proteins have a fixed orientation 249 Lipid asymmetry is maintained by enzymes 250 9 Membrane Transport 258 9.1 The Thermodynamics of Membrane Transport 258 Ion movements alter membrane potential 259 Membrane proteins mediate transmembrane ion movement 260 9.2 Passive Transport 263 Porins are β barrel proteins 263 Ion channels are highly selective 264 Gated channels undergo conformational changes 265 Box 9.A Pores Can Kill 265 Aquaporins are water-specific pores 266 Some transport proteins alternate between conformations 268 9.3 Active Transport 269 The Na,K-ATPase changes conformation as it pumps ions across the membrane 269 ABC transporters mediate drug resistance 271 Secondary active transport exploits existing gradients 271 9.4 Membrane Fusion 272 SNAREs link vesicle and plasma membranes 273 Box 9.B Antidepressants Block Serotonin Transport 275 Endocytosis is the reverse of exocytosis 276 Autophagosomes enclose cell materials for degradation 277 Box 9.C Exosomes 278 10 Signaling 287 10.1 General Features of Signaling Pathways 287 A ligand binds to a receptor with a characteristic affinity 288 Most signaling occurs through two types of receptors 289 The effects of signaling are limited 290 10.2 G Protein Signaling Pathways 291 G protein–coupled receptors include seven transmembrane helices 292 The receptor activates a G protein 293 The second messenger cyclic AMP activates protein kinase A 294 Arrestin competes with G proteins 296 Signaling pathways must be switched off 296 The phosphoinositide signaling pathway generates two second messengers 297 Many sensory receptors are GPCRs 298 Box 10.A Opioids 299 10.3 Receptor Tyrosine Kinases 300 The insulin receptor dimer changes conformation 300 The receptor undergoes autophosphorylation 302 Box 10.B Cell Signaling and Cancer 303 10.4 Lipid Hormone Signaling 303 Eicosanoids are short-range signals 305 Box 10.C Inhibitors of Cyclooxygenase 306 11 Carbohydrates 315 11.1 Monosaccharides 315 Most carbohydrates are chiral compounds 316 Cyclization generates α and β anomers 317 Monosaccharides can be derivatized in many different ways 318 Box 11.A The Maillard Reaction 319 11.2 Polysaccharides 320 Lactose and sucrose are the most common disaccharides 321 Starch and glycogen are fuel-storage molecules 321 Cellulose and chitin provide structural support 322 Box 11.B Cellulosic Biofuel 323 Bacterial polysaccharides form a biofilm 324 11.3 Glycoproteins 325 Oligosaccharides are N-linked or O-linked 325 Oligosaccharide groups are biological markers 326 Box 11.C The ABO Blood Group System 327 Proteoglycans contain long glycosaminoglycan chains 327 Bacterial cell walls are made of peptidoglycan 328 Part 3 Metabolism 12 Metabolism and Bioenergetics 337 12.1 Food and Fuel 337 Cells take up the products of digestion 338 Monomers are stored as polymers 339 Fuels are mobilized as needed 340 12.2 Metabolic Pathways 343 Some major metabolic pathways share a few common intermediates 343 Many metabolic pathways include oxidation–reduction reactions 344 Metabolic pathways are complex 346 Human metabolism depends on vitamins 347 Box 12.A The Transcriptome, the Proteome, and the Metabolome 348 Box 12.B Iron Metabolism 351 12.3 Free Energy Changes in Metabolic Reactions 352 The free energy change depends on reactant concentrations 352 Unfavorable reactions are coupled to favourable reactions 354 Energy can take different forms 356 Regulation occurs at the steps with the largest free energy changes 357 13 Glucose Metabolism 366 13.1 Glycolysis 366 Energy is invested at the start of glycolysis 367 ATP is generated near the end of glycolysis 373 Box 13.A Catabolism of Other Sugars 378 Some cells convert pyruvate to lactate or ethanol 379 Box 13.B Alcohol Metabolism 380 Pyruvate is the precursor of other molecules 381 13.2 Gluconeogenesis 383 Four gluconeogenic enzymes plus some glycolytic enzymes convert pyruvate to glucose 383 Gluconeogenesis is regulated at the fructose bisphosphatase step 385 13.3 Glycogen Synthesis and Degradation 386 Glycogen synthesis consumes the energy of UTP 386 Glycogen phosphorylase catalyzes glycogenolysis 388 13.4 The Pentose Phosphate Pathway 389 The oxidative reactions of the pentose phosphate pathway produce NADPH 389 Isomerization and interconversion reactions generate a variety of monosaccharides 390 A summary of glucose metabolism 392 13.5 Clinical Connection: Disorders of Carbohydrate Metabolism 393 Glycogen storage diseases affect liver and muscle 394 14 The Citric Acid Cycle 403 14.1 The Pyruvate Dehydrogenase Reaction 403 The pyruvate dehydrogenase complex contains multiple copies of three different enzymes 404 Pyruvate dehydrogenase converts pyruvate to acetyl-CoA 404 14.2 The Eight Reactions of the Citric Acid Cycle 406 1. Citrate synthase adds an acetyl group to oxaloacetate 407 2. Aconitase isomerizes citrate to isocitrate 409 3. Isocitrate dehydrogenase releases the first CO2 410 4. α-Ketoglutarate dehydrogenase releases the second CO2 410 5. Succinyl-CoA synthetase catalyzes substrate-level phosphorylation 411 6. Succinate dehydrogenase generates ubiquinol 412 7. Fumarase catalyzes a hydration reaction 412 8. Malate dehydrogenase regenerates oxaloacetate 412 14.3 Thermodynamics of the Citric Acid Cycle 413 The citric acid cycle is an energy-generating catalytic cycle 413 The citric acid cycle is regulated at three steps 414 Box 14.A Mutations in Citric Acid Cycle Enzymes 415 The citric acid cycle probably evolved as a synthetic pathway 415 14.4 Anabolic and Catabolic Functions of the Citric Acid Cycle 416 Citric acid cycle intermediates are precursors of other molecules 416 Anaplerotic reactions replenish citric acid cycle intermediates 418 Box 14.B The Glyoxylate Pathway 419 15 Oxidative Phosphorylation 428 15.1 The Thermodynamics of Oxidation–Reduction Reactions 428 Reduction potential indicates a substance’s tendency to accept electrons 429 The free energy change can be calculated from the change in reduction potential 431 15.2 Mitochondrial Electron Transport 432 Mitochondrial membranes define two compartments 433 Complex I transfers electrons from NADH to ubiquinone 434 Other oxidation reactions contribute to the ubiquinol pool 436 Complex III transfers electrons from ubiquinol to cytochrome c 437 Complex IV oxidizes cytochrome c and reduces O2 439 Respiratory complexes associate with each other 441 Box 15.A Reactive Oxygen Species 442 15.3 Chemiosmosis 443 Chemiosmosis links electron transport and oxidative phosphorylation 443 The proton gradient is an electrochemical gradient 443 15.4 ATP Synthase 445 Proton translocation rotates the c ring of ATP synthase 445 The binding change mechanism explains how ATP is made 447 The P:O ratio describes the stoichiometry of oxidative phosphorylation 447 Box 15.B Uncoupling Agents Prevent ATP Synthesis 448 The rate of oxidative phosphorylation reflects the need for ATP 448 Box 15.C Powering Human Muscles 449 16 Photosynthesis 458 16.1 Chloroplasts and Solar Energy 458 Pigments absorb light of different wavelengths 459 Light-harvesting complexes transfer energy to the reaction center 461 16.2 The Light Reactions 463 Photosystem II is a light-activated oxidation–reduction enzyme 463 The oxygen-evolving complex of Photosystem II oxidizes water 464 Cytochrome b6f links Photosystems I and II 466 A second photooxidation occurs at Photosystem I 467 Chemiosmosis provides the free energy for ATP synthesis 469 16.3 Carbon Fixation 471 Rubisco catalyzes CO2 fixation 471 The Calvin cycle rearranges sugar molecules 472 Box 16.A The C4 Pathway 473 The availability of light regulates carbon fixation 475 Calvin cycle products are used to synthesize sucrose and starch 476 17 Lipid Metabolism 483 17.1 Lipid Transport 483 17.2 Fatty Acid Oxidation 486 Fatty acids are activated before they are degraded 487 Each round of β oxidation has four reactions 488 Degradation of unsaturated fatty acids requires isomerization and reduction 491 Oxidation of odd-chain fatty acids yields propionyl-CoA 492 Some fatty acid oxidation occurs in peroxisomes 494 17.3 Fatty Acid Synthesis 495 Acetyl-CoA carboxylase catalyzes the first step of fatty acid synthesis 496 Fatty acid synthase catalyzes seven reactions 497 Other enzymes elongate and desaturate newly synthesized fatty acids 500 Box 17.A Fats, Diet, and Heart Disease 500 Fatty acid synthesis can be activated and inhibited 501 Box 17.B Inhibitors of Fatty Acid Synthesis 502 Acetyl-CoA can be converted to ketone bodies 503 17.4 Synthesis of Other Lipids 505 Triacylglycerols and phospholipids are built from acyl-CoA groups 505 Cholesterol synthesis begins with acetyl-CoA 508 A summary of lipid metabolism 510 18 Nitrogen Metabolism 518 18.1 Nitrogen Fixation and Assimilation 518 Nitrogenase converts N2 to NH3 519 Ammonia is assimilated by glutamine synthetase and glutamate synthase 519 Transamination moves amino groups between compounds 521 Box 18.A Transaminases in the Clinic 523 18.2 Amino Acid Biosynthesis 523 Several amino acids are easily synthesized from common metabolites 524 Amino acids with sulfur, branched chains, or aromatic groups are more difficult to synthesize 526 Box 18.B Homocysteine, Methionine, and One-Carbon Chemistry 527 Box 18.C Glyphosate, the Most Popular Herbicide 528 Amino acids are the precursors of some signaling molecules 530 Box 18.D Nitric Oxide 531 18.3 Amino Acid Catabolism 532 Amino acids are glucogenic, ketogenic, or both 532 Box 18.E Diseases of Amino Acid Metabolism 535 18.4 Nitrogen Disposal: The Urea Cycle 536 Glutamate supplies nitrogen to the urea cycle 537 The urea cycle consists of four reactions 538 18.5 Nucleotide Metabolism 540 Purine nucleotide synthesis yields IMP and then AMP and GMP 541 Pyrimidine nucleotide synthesis yields UTP and CTP 542 Ribonucleotide reductase converts ribonucleotides to deoxyribonucleotides 543 Thymidine nucleotides are produced by methylation 544 Nucleotide degradation produces urate or amino acids 545 19 Regulation of Mammalian Fuel Metabolism 555 19.1 Integration of Fuel Metabolism 555 Organs are specialized for different functions 556 Metabolites travel between organs 557 Box 19.A The Intestinal Microbiota Contribute to Metabolism 558 19.2 Hormonal Control of Fuel Metabolism 560 Insulin is released in response to glucose 560 Insulin promotes fuel use and storage 561 mTOR responds to insulin signaling 563 Glucagon and epinephrine trigger fuel mobilization 564 Additional hormones influence fuel metabolism 565 AMP-dependent protein kinase acts as a fuel sensor 566 Fuel metabolism is also controlled by redox balance and oxygen 566 19.3 Disorders of Fuel Metabolism 568 The body generates glucose and ketone bodies during starvation 568 Box 19.B Marasmus and Kwashiorkor 568 Obesity has multiple causes 569 Diabetes is characterized by hyperglycemia 570 Obesity, diabetes, and cardiovascular disease are linked 572 19.4 Clinical Connection: Cancer Metabolism 573 Aerobic glycolysis supports biosynthesis 573 Cancer cells consume large amounts of glutamine 574 Part 4 Genetic Information 20 DNA Replication and Repair 582 20.1 The DNA Replication Machinery 582 Replication occurs in factories 583 Helicases convert double-stranded DNA to single-stranded DNA 584 DNA polymerase faces two problems 585 DNA polymerases share a common structure and mechanism 587 DNA polymerase proofreads newly synthesized DNA 589 An RNase and a ligase are required to complete the lagging strand 590 20.2 Telomeres 593 Telomerase extends chromosomes 594 Box 20.A HIV Reverse Transcriptase 595 Is telomerase activity linked to cell immortality? 596 20.3 DNA Damage and Repair 596 DNA damage is unavoidable 597 Repair enzymes restore some types of damaged DNA 598 Base excision repair corrects the most frequent DNA lesions 598 Nucleotide excision repair targets the second most common form of DNA damage 599 Double-strand breaks can be repaired by joining the ends 601 Recombination also restores broken DNA molecules 601 Box 20.B Gene Editing with CRISPR 602 20.4 Clinical Connection: Cancer as a Genetic Disease 604 Tumor growth depends on multiple events 605 DNA repair pathways are closely linked to cancer 605 20.5 DNA Packaging 607 DNA is negatively supercoiled 607 Topoisomerases alter DNA supercoiling 608 Eukaryotic DNA is packaged in nucleosomes 610 20.6 Tools and Techniques: Manipulating DNA 611 Cutting and pasting generates recombinant DNA 612 The polymerase chain reaction amplifies DNA 614 DNA sequencing uses DNA polymerase to make a complementary strand 615 21 Transcription and RNA 627 21.1 Initiating Transcription 627 What is a gene? 628 DNA packaging affects transcription 628 DNA also undergoes covalent modification 631 Transcription begins at promoters 631 Transcription factors recognize eukaryotic promoters 633 Mediator integrates multiple regulatory signals 634 Box 21.A DNA-Binding Proteins 635 Prokaryotic operons allow coordinated gene expression 636 21.2 RNA Polymerase 638 RNA polymerases have a common structure and mechanism 639 Box 21.B RNA-Dependent RNA Polymerase 640 RNA polymerase is a processive enzyme 641 Transcription elongation requires changes in RNA polymerase 642 Transcription is terminated in several ways 644 21.3 RNA Processing 645 Eukaryotic mRNAs receive a 5′ cap and a 3′ poly(A) tail 645 Splicing removes introns from eukaryotic RNA 646 mRNA turnover and RNA interference limit gene expression 649 Box 21.C The Nuclear Pore Complex 649 rRNA and tRNA processing includes the addition, deletion, and modification of nucleotides 652 RNAs have extensive secondary structure 653 22 Protein Synthesis 663 22.1 tRNA and the Genetic Code 663 The genetic code is redundant 664 tRNAs have a common structure 665 tRNA aminoacylation consumes ATP 666 Editing increases the accuracy of aminoacylation 667 tRNA anticodons pair with mRNA codons 668 Box 22.A The Genetic Code Expanded 669 22.2 Ribosome Structure 669 The ribosome is mostly RNA 670 Three tRNAs and one mRNA bind to the ribosome 671 22.3 Translation 673 Initiation requires an initiator tRNA 673 The appropriate tRNAs are delivered to the ribosome during elongation 675 The peptidyl transferase active site catalyzes peptide bond formation 677 Box 22.B Antibiotic Inhibitors of Protein Synthesis 679 Release factors mediate translation termination 680 Translation is efficient and dynamic 681 22.4 Post-Translational Events 683 Chaperones promote protein folding 684 The signal recognition particle targets some proteins for membrane translocation 685 Many proteins undergo covalent modification 687 Glossary G-1 Odd-Numbered Solutions S-1 Index i-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 An Introduction to Chemistry 1 2 Standards for Measurement 14 3 Elements and Compounds 49 4 Properties of Matter 69 5 Early Atomic Theory and Structure 89 6 Nomenclature of Inorganic Compounds 107 7 Quantitative Composition of Compounds 130 8 Chemical Equations 155 9 Calculations from Chemical Equations 184 10 Modern Atomic Theory and the Periodic Table 207 11 Chemical Bonds: The Formation of Compounds from Atoms 229 12 The Gaseous State of Matter 265 13 Liquids 304 14 Solutions 328 15 Acids, Bases, and Salts 361 16 Chemical Equilibrium 387 17 Oxidation–Reduction 419 18 Nuclear Chemistry 000 19 Introduction to Organic Chemistry (online only) 000 20 Introduction to Biochemistry (online only) 000 APPENDICES A-1 GLOSSARY 000 INDEX 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 The Basics: Bonding and Molecular Structure 1 2 Families of Carbon Compounds: Functional Groups, Intermolecular Forces, and Infrared (IR) Spectroscopy 54 3 Acids and Bases: An Introduction to Organic Reactions and Their Mechanisms 106 4 Nomenclature and Conformations of Alkanes and Cycloalkanes 148 5 Stereochemistry: Chiral Molecules 198 6 Nucleophilic Reactions: Properties and Substitution Reactions of Alkyl Halides 246 7 Alkenes and Alkynes I: Properties and Synthesis. Elimination Reactions of Alkyl Halides 289 8 Alkenes and Alkynes II: Addition Reactions 345 9 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Mass Spectrometry: Tools for Structure Determination 400 10 Radical Reactions 454 11 Alcohols and Ethers: Synthesis and Reactions 496 12 Alcohols from Carbonyl Compounds: Oxidation–Reduction and Organometallic Compounds 545 13 Conjugated Unsaturated Systems 584 14 Aromatic Compounds 632 15 Reactions of Aromatic Compounds 675 16 Aldehydes and Ketones: Nucleophilic Addition to the Carbonyl Group 730 17 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives: Nucleophilic Addition–Elimination at the Acyl Carbon 781 18 Reactions at the α Carbon of Carbonyl Compounds: Enols and Enolates 834 19 Condensation and Conjugate Addition Reactions of Carbonyl Compounds: More Chemistry of Enolates 873 20 Amines 916 21 Transition Metal Complexes: Promoters of Key Bond-Forming Reactions 966 22 Carbohydrates 994 23 Lipids 1042 24 Amino Acids and Proteins 1078 25 Nucleic Acids and Protein Synthesis 1124 Glossary GL-1 Index I-1 Endpapers Special topics (A-H) (online only) Review problem sets (online only) Answers to selected problems (online only)

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsTo the Student vi Introduction: “Solving the Puzzle” or “Structure Is Everything (almost)” vii Chapter 1 The Basics: Bonding and Molecular Structure 1 Solutions to Problems 1 Quiz 16 Chapter 2 Families of Carbon Compounds: Functional Groups, Intermolecular Forces, and Infrared (ir) Spectroscopy 18 Solutions to Problems 18 Quiz 32 Chapter 3 Acids and Bases: An Introduction to Organic Reactions and Their Mechanisms 35 Solutions to Problems 35 Quiz 48 Chapter 4 Nomenclature and Conformations of Alkanes And Cycloalkanes 50 Solutions to Problems 50 Quiz 66 Chapter 5 Stereochemistry: Chiral Molecules 69 Solutions to Problems 69 Quiz 86 Chapter 6 Nucleophilic Reactions: Properties And Substitution Reactions of Alkyl Halides 89 Solutions to Problems 89 Quiz 104 Chapter 7 Alkenes and Alkynes I: Properties And Synthesis. Elimination Reactions of Alkyl Halides 106 Solutions to Problems 106 Quiz 134 Chapter 8 Alkenes and Alkynes II: Addition Reactions 137 Solutions to Problems 137 Quiz 162 Chapter 9 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Mass Spectrometry: Tools for Structure Determination 165 Solutions to Problems 165 Quiz 188 Chapter 10 Radical Reactions 190 Solutions to Problems 190 Quiz 209 Chapter 11 Alcohols and Ethers: Synthesis And Reactions 212 Solutions to Problems 212 Quiz 239 Chapter 12 Alcohols From Carbonyl Compounds: Oxidation-reduction And Organometallic Compounds 240 Solutions to Problems 240 Quiz 269 Answers to First Review Problem Set 275 (First Review Problem Set is available only in WileyPlus, www.wileyplus.com) Chapter 13 Conjugated Unsaturated Systems 296 Solutions to Problems 296 Quiz 319 Summary of Reactions by Type, Chapters 1–13 321 Methods for Functional Group Preparation, Chapters 1–13 325 Chapter 14 Aromatic Compounds 328 Solutions to Problems 328 Quiz 344 Chapter 15 Reactions of Aromatic Compounds 346 Solutions to Problems 346 Quiz 383 Chapter 16 Aldehydes and Ketones. Nucleophilic Addition to the Carbonyl Group 385 Solutions to Problems 385 Quiz 418 Chapter 17 Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives: Nucleophilic Addition-elimination at the Acyl Carbon 420 Solutions to Problems 420 Quiz 452 Chapter 18 Reactions at the Carbon of Carbonyl Compounds: Enols and Enolates 455 Solutions to Problems 455 Quiz 485 Chapter 19 Condensation and Conjugate Addition Reactions of Carbonyl Compounds: More Chemistry of Enolates 487 Solutions to Problems 487 Quiz 529 Chapter 20 Amines 534 Solutions to Problems 537 Quiz 574 Chapter 21 Transition Metal Complexes: Promoters of Key Bond-forming Reactions 578 Solutions to Problems 578 Quiz 589 Answers to Second Review Problem Set 591 (Second Review Problem Set is available only in WileyPlus, www.wileyplus.com) Chapter 22 Carbohydrates 610 Solutions to Problems 611 Quiz 636 Chapter 23 Lipids 640 Solutions to Problems 640 Quiz 652 Chapter 24 Amino Acids and Proteins 655 Solutions to Problems 655 Quiz 670 Chapter 25 Nucleic Acids and Protein Synthesis 671 Solutions to Problems 671 Special Topics are available only in WileyPlus, www.wileyplus.com. Solutions to problems in the Special Topics are found on the following pages: Special Topic A 13C NMR Spectroscopy 679 Special Topic B NMR Theory and Instrumentation 680 Special Topic C Chain-Growth Polymers 681 Special Topic D Electrocyclic and Cycloaddition Reactions 682 Special Topic E Step-Growth Polymers 687 Special Topic F Thiols, Sulfur Ylides, and Disulfides 693 Special Topic G Thiol Esters and Lipid Biosynthesis 695 Special Topic H Alkaloids 696 Appendix A Empirical and Molecular Formulas 701 Problems 703 Additional Problems 704 Solutions to Problems of Appendix A 705 Appendix B Answers to Quizzes 709 Appendix C Molecular Model Set Exercises 723

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 106th volume in this series for organic chemists in academia and industry presents critical discussions of the following widely used organic reactions: ALKENE CROSS-METATHESIS REACTIONSKarol Grela, Anna Kajetanowicz, Anna Szadkowska, and Justyna Czaban-Jozwiak THE CATALYTIC ENANTIOSELECTIVE STETTER REACTIONDarrin M. Flanigan, Kerem E. Ozboya, Subhash D. Tanpure, Alberto Munoz, Paul R. Blakemore, and Tomislav RovisTable of Contents1. Alkene Cross-Metathesis Reactions 1Karol Grela, Anna Kajetanowicz, Anna Szadkowska and Justyna Czaban-Jóźwiak 2. The Catalytic Enantioselective Stetter Reaction. 1191Darrin M. Flanigan, Kerem E. Ozboya, Alberto Muñoz, Tomislav Rovis, Subhash D. Tanpure and Paul R. Blakemore Cumulative Chapter Titles by Volume 1331 Author Index, Volumes 1–1061351 Chapter and Topic Index, Volumes 1–1061359

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 107th volume in this series for organic chemists in academia and industry presents critical discussions of the following widely used organic reactions: ENANTIOSELECTIVE HYDROFORMYLATIONToshiki Tazawa, Andreas Phanopoulos, and Kyoko Nozaki HAUSER?KRAUS, SAMMES, STAUNTON?WEINREB, AND TAMURA ANNULATIONSCharles B. de Koning, Kathy Hadje Georgiou, Joseph P. Michael, and Amanda L. RousseauTable of Contents1. Enantioselective Hydroformylation 1Toshiki Tazawa, Andreas Phanopoulos, and Kyoko Nozaki 2. Hauser–Kraus, Sammes, Staunton–Weinreb, and Tamura Annulations 565Charles B. de Koning, Kathy Hadje Georgiou, Joseph P. Michael, and Amanda L. Rousseau Cumulative Chapter Titles by Volume 1105 Author Index, Volumes 1–107 1125 Chapter and Topic Index, Volumes 1–107 1133

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first edition in 1948, Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology has become a flagship publication for Wiley. During its nearly seven decades in print, it has become a standard reference for the fields of occupational health and toxicology. The volumes on industrial hygiene are cornerstone reference works for not only industrial hygienists but also chemists, engineers, toxicologists, lawyers, and occupational safety personnel. Volume 3 covers Recognition and Evaluation of Physical Agents and Biohazards. All of the chapters have been updated and a new chapter on Robotics has been added. These subjects are increasing in importance to industrial hygienists.Table of ContentsContributors vii Preface ix Useful Equivalents and Conversion Factors xi Part V Physical Agents 1 Ionizing Radiation 3 Herman Cember and Thomas E. Johnson Nonionizing Radiation: Lasers 23 David H. Sliney Nonionizing Radiation: Broadband Optical 37 Margaret L. Phillips and Allene H. Butler Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields 63 Kenneth R. Foster and Richard A. Tell Nonionizing Radiation: Extremely Low Frequency 95 Mona Shum and Jesse Cooper Noise and Hearing Conservation 107 David C. Byrne and Kevin L. Michael Physiological Effects of Altered Barometric Pressure 141 Claude A. Piantadosi Hand-Arm Vibration 163 Christopher M. Nelson Cold Stress 189 Tiina M. Ikäheimo, Kalev Kuklane, Jouni J.K. Jaakkola, and Ingvar Holmér Heat Stress 219 Michael D. Larrañaga Occupational Ergonomics: Past, Present, and Future 261 Susan Kotowski, Kermit Davis, and Amit Bhattacharya Robotics in the Workplace 287 Frank J. Hearl, Vladimir Murashov, John Howard, Hongwei Hsiao, John Sammarco, Brian Lowe, and George Luxbacher Part VI Biological Agents 303 Occupational Microbiological Biohazards – Exposure, Detection, and Disease 305 Tiina Reponen Control of Biohazards 343 Nancy C. Burton Airborne and Emerging Infectious Diseases 369 Augusto Dulanto Chiang and Tara N. Palmore Index 391

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first edition in 1948, Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology has become a flagship publication for Wiley. During its nearly seven decades in print, it has become a standard reference for the fields of occupational health and toxicology. The volumes on industrial hygiene are cornerstone reference works for not only industrial hygienists but also chemists, engineers, toxicologists, lawyers, and occupational safety personnel. Volume 4 covers environmental and health and safety program management, with a number of new chapters on sustainability, construction health and safety, health and safety of new energies and working with cannabis.Table of ContentsContributors vii Preface ix Useful Equivalents and Conversion Factors xi Part VII Program Management 1 Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems 3 Charles F. Redinger, Alan J. Leibowitz, and Victor M. Toy Sustainability and the Role of the Safety and Health Professional 37 S. Zack Mansdorf Product Stewardship: A Viable Practice for the Industrial Hygienist 47 Thomas G. Grumbles Part VIII Specialty Areas 63 Emergency and Disaster: Preparedness, Response, and Recovery 65 Chris Laszcz-Davis, Mary Massey, Alan J. Leibowitz, Daniel Hardt, Herman Woessner, Jim Jabara, Fabrice Lebourgeois, Vicki Villarreal, Ron R. McHaney, Peggy Otum, David Barnes, and Steven P. Pereira Hazardous Wastes 125 Lisa Simkins Barnes and Meredith G. Durant Industrial Hygiene Issues in Construction 139 Bruce Lippy, Gavin H. West, Matthew Gillen, Eileen Betit, Linda M. Goldenhar, Babak Memarian, Richard Rinehart, Grace Barlet, M.K. Fletcher, Sara Brooks, and Jean Christophe Le Agriculture Hygiene 167 Kelley J. Donham and Matthew Nonnenmann Health Care Industry: Contemporary Considerations 195 Robert J. Emery, Michael A. Charlton, Bruce J. Brown, and Scott J. Patlovich Air Pollution 207 Paul G. Reinhart, Lori White, Jee Young Kim, Lindsay Wichers Stanek, Mary Ross, Barbara Buckley, and James A. Murray Health and Safety Factors in Designing an Industrial Hygiene Laboratory 255 Robert G. Lieckfield Fire Safety in the Workplace 279 Richard L. P. Custer and Pamela A. Powell Advancing the Well-Being of Workers: An Introduction to Total Worker Health‸ Approaches 297 L. Casey Chosewood and Sara L. Tamers Health and Safety Issues of New Energy Technologies 311 Brian Heramb Cannabis 333 Robert N. Phalen Indoor Air Quality in Nonindustrial Occupational Environments 357 John P. Springston, Elliott Horner, and Joseph Lstiburek Index 415 Cumulative Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisA compelling exploration of how social norms and commercial culture impact the safety of organizational operations In Impact of Societal Norms on Safety, Health, and the Environment: Case Studies in Society and Safety Culture, distinguished engineer Dr. Lee T. Ostrom delivers an authoritative treatment of the cultural, social, and human factors of safety cultures and issues in the workplace. The book offers readers compelling discussions of how those factors impact organizational operations and what contributes to making those impacts beneficial or detrimental. The author provides numerous real-world case studies from North America and Europe that are relevant to a global audience, highlighting the central message of the book: that an organization that views its safety culture as unimportant could be setting itself up for a significant workplace accident. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to social norms that impact how commercial organiTable of ContentsPreface xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Safety Culture Concepts 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Culture 2 1.2 Safety and Health Pioneers 4 1.3 The Evolution of Accident Causation Models 5 1.4 Safety and Common Sense 13 1.5 Interviews with Safety Professionals 14 1.6 Chapter Summary 59 References 59 2 History of Safety Culture 61 2.1 Life Expectancy and Safety 61 2.2 Consumer Items and Toys 65 2.2.1 Vintage Toys and Other Items 66 2.3 Flawed Cars 69 2.4 Ford Pinto 69 2.5 Off-Highway-Vehicle-Related Fatalities Reported 70 2.6 Work Relationships 71 2.7 Food 75 2.7.1 Food Trends and Culture 78 2.7.1.1 The Tomato 78 2.7.1.2 Fad Diets 78 2.8 Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO) Foods 80 2.8.1 Messenger Ribonucleic Acid (mRNA) Vaccines 82 2.9 Traffic Safety 83 2.10 Public Acceptance of Seatbelts and Masks for Protection from Respiratory Disease 86 2.11 Radiation Hazards and Safety 90 2.11.1 Radiation 91 2.11.2 Measuring Radiation (CDC 2021) 93 2.11.3 Health Effects of Radiation (EPA 2021) 95 2.11.4 Uses of Radiation (NRC 2020) 97 2.11.5 Medical Uses 97 2.11.6 Academic and Scientific Applications 98 2.11.7 Industrial Uses 98 2.11.8 Nuclear Power Plants 100 2.11.9 Misuse of Radiation (EPA 2021) 101 2.11.10 Radium Dial Painters 101 2.11.11 Safety Culture Issues 103 2.12 The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 103 2.12.1 Who Does OSHA Cover 105 2.12.1.1 Private Sector Workers 105 2.12.1.2 State and Local Government Workers 105 2.12.1.3 Federal Government Workers 106 2.12.1.4 Not Covered Under the OSHA Act 106 2.12.2 Voluntary Protection Program 107 2.13 Human Performance Improvement (HPI) 111 2.14 Chapter Summary 112 References 112 3 Chemical Manufacturing 119 3.0 Introduction 119 3.1 Process Safety Management 119 3.1.1 Introduction 119 3.1.2 Process Safety Management 121 3.1.2.1 Process Safety Information 123 3.1.2.2 Process Hazards Analysis 126 3.1.2.3 Operating Procedures 129 3.1.2.4 Mechanical Integrity 131 3.1.2.5 Management of Change 136 3.2 DuPont La Porte, TX, Methyl Mercaptan Release – November 15, 2014 138 3.2.1 Accident Description and Analysis 139 3.2.2 DuPont’s Initiation of Process Safety Culture Assessments 160 3.2.3 Summary of Safety Culture Findings 162 3.3 BP Texas City Refinery Explosion – March 23, 2005 163 3.3.1 Introduction 163 3.3.2 Texas City 164 3.3.3 Description of the BP Refinery 165 3.3.4 The Accident 167 3.3.5 Trailer Siting Recommendations 173 3.3.6 Blowdown Drum and Stack Recommendations 174 3.3.7 Additional Recommendations from July 28, 2005, Incident 174 3.3.8 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 174 3.4 T2 Laboratories, Inc. Explosion – December 19, 2007 175 3.4.1 T2 Laboratories, Inc. 175 3.4.2 Event Description 176 3.4.3 Events Leading Up to the Explosion 176 3.4.4 Analysis of the Accident 180 3.4.5 Process Development 183 3.4.6 Manufacturing Process 184 3.4.7 Summary Safety Culture Issues 185 3.5 Final Thoughts for This Chapter 186 References 186 4 Chemical Storage Explosions 189 4.0 Introduction 189 4.1 Port of Lebanon – August 4, 2020 190 4.1.1 PEPCON Explosion – May 4, 1988 191 4.1.2 Lessons Learned 201 4.1.3 Safety Culture Issues 203 4.2 PCA DeRidder Paper Mill Gas System Explosion, DeRidder, Louisiana – February 8, 2017 203 4.2.1 PCA DeRidder Mill 205 4.2.2 The Explosion 205 4.2.3 Safety Culture Summary 210 4.3 West Fertilizer Explosion – April 17, 2013 211 4.3.1 The Fire and Explosion 212 4.3.2 Injuries and Fatalities 215 4.3.3 Safety Culture Summary 215 References 216 5 Dust Explosions and Entertainment Venue Case Studies 219 5.0 Introduction 219 5.1 Dust Explosion Information and Case Studies 221 5.2 AL Solutions December 9, 2010 225 5.2.1 Facility Description 225 5.2.2 Zirconium 228 5.2.3 Description of the Incident 228 5.2.4 The Origin of the Explosion 231 5.2.5 AL Solutions Dust Management Practices 234 5.2.6 Water Deluge System 235 5.2.7 Safety Audits 235 5.2.8 Hydrogen Explosion 237 5.2.9 Previous Fires And Explosions 237 5.2.10 Summary of Safety Culture Findings 239 5.3 Imperial Sugar Company, February 7, 2008 239 5.3.1 Sugar 239 5.3.2 Accident Description 240 5.3.3 Synopsis of Events 240 5.3.4 Detailed Accident Scenario 242 5.3.5 The Chemical Safety Board Investigation 243 5.3.6 South Packing Building 248 5.3.7 Sugar Spillage and Dust Control 249 5.3.8 Force of the Explosion 250 5.3.9 Pre-explosion Sugar Dust Incident History 251 5.3.10 Steel Belt Conveyor Modifications 251 5.3.11 Primary Event Location 252 5.3.12 Primary Event Combustible Dust Source 253 5.3.13 Secondary Dust Explosions 255 5.3.14 Ignition Sources 256 5.3.15 Open Flames and Hot Surfaces 256 5.3.16 Ignition Sources Inside the Steel Belt Enclosure 257 5.3.16.1 Hot Surface Ignition 257 5.3.16.2 Friction Sparks 258 5.3.16.3 Worker Training 258 5.3.17 Evacuation, Fire Alarms, and Fire Suppression 259 5.3.18 Electrical Systems Design 260 5.3.19 Sugar Dust Handling Equipment 261 5.3.20 Housekeeping and Dust Control 262 5.3.21 Imperial Sugar Management and Workers 263 5.3.22 Chemical Safety Board Key Findings 265 5.3.23 Summary of Safety Culture Findings 266 5.4 Entertainment Venue Case Studies 267 5.4.1 Introduction 267 5.4.2 Crowd Surge Events 267 5.4.3 Fires at Bars and Nightclubs 267 5.4.4 The New Taipei Water Park Fire – June 2015 268 5.5 Safety Culture Summary 270 References 270 6 University Laboratory Accident Case Studies 273 6.0 Introduction 273 6.1 My Experience at Aalto University 273 6.2 Texas Tech University October 2008 284 6.2.1 Specifically, the CSB Found 299 6.3 University of California Los Angeles – December 29, 2008 300 6.4 University of Utah – July 2017 302 6.4.1 Utah, Report to the Utah Legislature Number 2019-06 302 6.5 University of Hawaii – March 16, 2016 306 6.5.1 Grounding (OSHA 2021) 307 6.5.1.1 Summary of Grounding Requirements 308 6.5.1.2 Methods of Grounding Equipment 308 6.5.1.3 Event Description 309 6.5.1.4 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 311 References 312 7 Aviation Case Studies 315 7.0 Introduction 315 7.1 Helicopter Accident 337 7.1.1 Liberty Helicopter Crash March 11, 2018 338 7.1.1.1 Overview 338 7.1.1.2 Liberty Helicopter’s Safety Program 346 7.1.1.3 Safety Culture Summary 354 7.2 Commercial Aviation 355 7.2.1 Successful Landing of Crippled Commercial Airliners 355 7.2.2 Gimli Glider – Successful Landing of a Crippled Commercial Airliner 1 – July 23, 1983 356 7.2.2.1 Accident Information 356 7.2.2.2 Analysis of the Fuel Problem 362 7.3 Illegal Dispatch Contrary to the MEL: Taking Off With Blank Fuel Gauges 370 7.4 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 373 7.5 Miracle on the Hudson River – Successful Landing of a Crippled Commercial Airliner 2, January 15, 2009 374 7.5.1 Accident Information 374 7.5.2 Flight Crew and Cabin Crew 377 7.5.3 The Captain’s 72-Hour History 379 7.5.4 The First Officer 380 7.5.4.1 The First Officer’s 72-Hour History 380 7.5.4.2 The Flight Attendants 381 7.5.4.3 Airbus A320-214 381 7.5.4.4 Operational Factors 382 7.5.4.5 Flight Crew Training 384 7.5.4.6 Dual-Engine Failure Training 385 7.5.4.7 Ditching Training 386 7.5.4.8 CRM and TEM Training 387 7.5.4.9 FAA Oversight 388 7.5.4.10 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 389 7.6 737 MAX 389 7.6.1 Introduction 389 7.6.2 737 MAX Design and Manufacture 390 7.6.3 Accidents 391 7.6.4 Design Certification of the 737 MAX 8 and Safety Assessment of the MCAS 393 7.6.5 Assumptions about Pilot Recognition and Response in the Safety Assessment 395 7.7 De Haviland Comet 400 7.8 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 401 References 401 8 Nuclear Energy Case Studies 405 8.0 Introduction 405 8.1 Nuclear Power 405 8.1.1 Sodium Cooled Reactors 409 8.1.1.1 Santa Susana – 1959 410 8.1.1.2 Fission Gas Release 411 8.1.1.3 Fermi 1 – Near Detroit Michigan – 1966 413 8.1.1.4 Safety Culture Summary of Sodium Cooled Reactors 414 8.1.2 The Vladimir Lenin Nuclear Power Plant or Chernobyl Nuclear Power Plant (ChNPP) – April 26, 1986 415 8.1.2.1 Reactivity and Power Control 416 8.1.2.2 Chernobyl Accident 418 8.1.3 Three Mile Island Accident – March 28, 1979 (NRC 2022a) 421 8.1.3.1 Accident 421 8.1.3.2 Summary of Events 422 8.1.3.3 Health Effects 425 8.1.3.4 Impact of the Accident 425 8.1.3.5 Current Status 426 8.1.3.6 Human Factor Engineering Findings (Malone et al. 1980) 427 8.1.3.7 Human Engineering and Human Error 428 8.1.3.8 Procedures 428 8.2 Nuclear Criticality 430 8.2.1 Mayak Production Association, 10 December 1968 (LANL 2000) 430 8.2.1.1 Safety Culture Issues 435 8.2.2 National Reactor Testing Station – January 3, 1961 (LANL 2000) 436 8.2.2.1 Safety Culture Issues 437 8.2.3 JCO Fuel Fabrication Plant – September 30, 1999 (LANL 2000) 438 8.2.3.1 Safety Culture Issues 441 8.3 Medical Misadministration of Radioisotopes Events 442 8.3.1 Loss of Iridium-192 Source at the Indiana Regional Cancer Center (IRCC) – November 1992 444 8.3.1.1 Introduction 444 8.3.1.2 Event Description 444 8.3.1.3 Patient Treatment Plan 444 8.3.2 Greater Pittsburgh Cancer Center Incident 455 8.3.3 Omnitron High Dose Rate (HDR) Remote Afterloader System 456 8.3.3.1 Description of the Afterloader System 456 8.3.3.2 High Dose Rate Afterloader 456 8.3.3.3 Main Console 461 8.3.3.4 Door Status Panel 461 8.3.3.5 Afterloader System Safety Features 462 8.3.3.6 Patient Applicators and Treatment Tubes 462 8.3.3.7 Description of the Source Wire 462 8.3.3.8 Prototype Testing Performed on Nickel–Titanium Source Wire 464 8.3.3.9 Description of the Omnitron 2000 Afterloader System Software 464 8.3.3.10 Equipment Performance 468 8.3.3.11 Failure Analysis Pertaining to the Source Wire 468 8.3.3.12 Possible Failure Areas 468 8.3.3.13 Organization of Oncology Services Corporation 469 8.3.3.14 Management Oversight 469 8.3.3.15 Safety Culture 470 8.3.3.16 Emergency Operating Procedures 474 8.3.3.17 Training 474 8.3.3.18 Radiation Safety Training at the Indiana Regional Cancer Center 475 8.3.3.19 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 476 8.4 Goiania, Brazil Teletherapy Machine Incident (IAEA 1988) 476 8.4.1 Safety Culture Summary 481 References 481 9 Other Transportation Case Studies 485 9.1 Large Marine Vessel Accidents 485 9.1.1 LNG Carrier Collision with Barge 485 9.1.1.1 Accident Description 487 9.1.1.2 Work/Rest of Ships’ Crews 499 9.1.1.3 Drug and Alcohol Testing 501 9.1.1.4 Findings 502 9.2 Navy Vessel Collisions 503 9.2.1 USS FITZGERALD Collided with the Motor Vessel ACX Crystal 503 9.2.1.1 Summary of Findings 504 9.2.1.2 Background 505 9.2.1.3 Events Leading to the Collision 506 9.2.1.4 Collision 507 9.2.1.5 Impact to Berthing 2 514 9.2.1.6 Findings 519 9.2.1.7 Training 520 9.2.1.8 Seamanship and Navigation 520 9.2.1.9 Leadership and Culture 520 9.2.1.10 Fatigue 521 9.2.1.11 Timeline of Events 521 9.2.2 Collision of USS JOHN S MCCAIN with Motor Vessel ALNIC MC 524 9.2.2.1 Introduction 524 9.2.2.2 Summary of Findings 525 9.2.2.3 Background 525 9.2.2.4 Events Leading to the Collision 527 9.2.2.5 Results of Collision 530 9.2.2.6 Impact to Berthing 5 533 9.2.2.7 Impact on Berthing 3 536 9.2.2.8 Impact on Berthings 4, 6, and 7 539 9.2.2.9 Findings 542 9.2.2.10 Training 542 9.2.2.11 Seamanship and Navigation 543 9.2.2.12 Leadership and Culture 543 9.2.2.13 Timeline of Events 544 9.2.2.14 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 548 9.3 Stretch Duck 7 July 19, 2018 548 9.3.1 Introduction 548 9.3.2 Accident Description 549 9.3.3 1999 Sinking of Miss Majestic 552 9.3.4 Types of DUKW Amphibious Vessels 553 9.3.5 NTSB Identified Safety Issue No. 1: Providing Reserve Buoyancy 556 9.3.6 Safety Issue No. 2: Removing Canopies and Side Curtains 557 9.3.7 Findings and Conclusions 560 9.3.8 Safety Culture Summary Findings 560 9.3.9 Other Events 560 9.3.9.1 Minnow, Milwaukee Harbor, Lake Michigan, September 18, 2000 560 9.3.9.2 DUKW No. 1, Lake Union, Seattle,Washington, December 8, 2001 561 9.3.9.3 DUKW 34, Delaware River, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, July 7, 2010 561 9.3.9.4 DUCK 6, Seattle,Washington, September 24, 2015 561 9.4 Recent Railroad Accidents 561 9.4.1 AMTRAK Passenger Train – May 12, 2015 562 9.4.1.1 Accident Scenario 562 9.4.1.2 Amtrak 565 9.4.1.3 Analysis of the Engineer’s Actions 566 9.4.1.4 Loss of Situational Awareness 569 9.4.1.5 Two-Person Crews 572 9.4.1.6 Factors Not Contributing to This Accident 572 9.4.1.7 NTSB Probable Cause 574 9.4.1.8 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 574 9.4.2 Transportation Safety Board of Canada (2013a) 574 9.4.2.1 Personnel Information 578 9.4.2.2 Train Brakes 583 9.4.2.3 Locomotives 586 9.4.2.4 Rules and Instructions on Securing Equipment 587 9.4.2.5 Locomotive Event Recorder 590 9.4.2.6 Sense and Braking Unit 592 9.4.2.7 Mandatory Off-Duty Times for Operating Employees 592 9.4.2.8 Securement of Trains (MMA-002) at Nantes 592 9.4.2.9 Securement of Trains (MMA-001) at Vachon 593 9.4.2.10 Recent Runaway Train History at Montreal, Maine, and Atlantic Railway and Previous TSB Investigations 593 9.4.2.11 Training and Requalification of Montreal, Maine, and Atlantic Railway Crews in Farnham 594 9.4.2.12 Training and Requalification of the Locomotive Engineer 595 9.4.2.13 Operational Tests and Inspections at Montreal, Maine, and Atlantic Railway 595 9.4.2.14 Implementation of Single-Person Train Operations 597 9.4.2.15 Canadian Railway Operating Rules (CROR) 599 9.4.2.16 Single-Person Train Operations at Montreal, Maine, and Atlantic Railway 599 9.4.2.17 Review of the Montreal, Maine, and Atlantic Railway Submission and its Relation to the Requirements of Standard CSA Q850 601 9.4.2.18 Research into Single-Person Train Operations 602 9.4.2.19 Safety Culture 603 9.4.2.20 Summary of Safety Culture Issues 604 References 604 10 Assessing Safety Culture 607 10.0 Introduction 607 10.1 Survey Research Principles 608 10.1.1 Developing the Survey Instrument 609 10.1.1.1 Developing the Questions/Statements 609 10.1.1.2 Question/Statement Development 611 10.1.1.3 Sampling 612 10.1.1.4 Demographics 612 10.1.1.5 Survey Delivery 613 10.1.1.6 Analyzing the Results and Reports 613 10.1.1.7 Final Thoughts on Developing and Delivering Surveys 614 10.1.2 Safety Culture Assessment Methods 614 10.1.2.1 DuPont (DuPont) De Nemours Sustainable Solutions (DSS) 614 10.1.2.2 Department of Energy Assessment of Safety Culture Sustainment Processes 615 10.1.2.3 Institute for Nuclear Power Operations Safety Culture Assessment 617 10.1.2.4 Developing Team Findings 619 10.1.3 United States Air Force Assessment Tool 619 10.2 Assessing Health Care Safety Culture 620 10.3 Seven Steps to Assess Safety Culture 621 10.3.1 A Framework for Assessing Safety Culture 623 10.3.2 Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality 623 10.3.3 Graduate Student Safety Culture Survey 623 10.3.4 Idaho National Engineering Laboratory Survey 626 10.4 Chapter Summary 634 References 634 Index 637

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsListe des contributeurs ix Préface xvii 1 Recherche sur le bassin du Congo : construire une base pour l’avenir 1Raphael M. Tshimanga, Guy D. Moukandi N’kaya, Alain Laraque, Sharon E. Nicholson, Jean-Marie Kileshye Onema, Raymond Lumbuenamo, et Douglas Alsdorf Partie I Influences sur la pluviométrie 2 Climat de l’Afrique centrale : avancées et lacunes 15Wilfried Pokam Mba, Derbetini Appolinaire Vondou, et Pierre Honore Kamsu-Tamo 3 Le régime pluviométrique et convectif sur l’Afrique équatoriale, en particulier sur le bassin du Congo 25Sharon E. Nicholson 4 Influence de la paramétrisation du «slab-ocean» dans le modèle climatique regional RegCM4 en Afrique centrale 51François Xavier Mengouna, Derbetini A. Vondou, Armand Joel Komkoua Mbienda, Thierry C. Fotso-Nguemo, Denis Sonkoué, Zéphirin Yepdo-Djomou, et Pascal M. Igri 5 Comprendre l’influence de la variabilité climatique sur l’hydrologie des eaux de surface dans le bassin du Congo 65Christopher E. Ndehedehe, Vagner G. Ferreira, Augusto Getirana, et Nathan O. Agutu 6 Dynamique hydroclimatique de la rivière Oubangui amont à Mobaye, République centrafricaine : étude comparée du rôle de la savane et de la forêt équatoriale 87Cyriaque-Rufin Nguimalet, Didier Orange, Jean-Pascal Waterendji, et Athanase Yambele 7 Évaluation des produits 3B42 et 3B43 de Tropical Rainfall Measuring Mission (TRMM) par rapport aux observations des stations météorologiques synoptiques sur le Cameroun 103Pascal M. Igri, Roméo Stève Tanessong, Derbetini Appolinaire Vondou, Wilfried Pokam Mba, Taguemfo Kammalac Jores, Samuel Kaïssassou, Guy Merlin Guenang, Armand Joel Komkoua Mbienda, et Zéphirin Yepdo-Djomou Partie II Variations des pluviométrie et du ruissellement 8 Nouveau regard sur l’hydrologie dans le bassin du Congo, à partir de l’étude des chroniques hydro-pluviométriques pluri-décennales 129Guy D. Moukandi N’kaya, Alain Laraque, Jean-Emmanuel Paturel, Georges Gulemvuga Guzanga, Gil Mahé, et Raphael M. Tshimanga 9 Changements historiques dans les régimes pluviométriques sur le bassin du Congo et impacts sur le ruissellement (1903–2010) 151Christopher E. Ndehedehe et Nathan O. Agutu 10 Bilan hydrique et sécheresses dans les conditions actuelles et futures dans le bassin du fleuve Congo 171Venkataramana Sridhar, Hyunwoo Kang, Syed A. Ali, Gode B. Bola, Raphael M. Tshimanga, et Venkataraman Lakshmi 11 Variabilité spatio-temporelle des sécheresses dans le bassin du fleuve Congo : le rôle du transport de l’humidité atmosphérique 193Robert Sorí, Milica Stojanovic, Raquel Nieto, Margarida L. R. Liberato, et Luis Gimeno Partie III Hydrologie et hydraulique 12 Deux décennies de la modélisation et la prédiction hydrologiques dans le bassin du Congo : progrès et perspectives pour les investigations futures 213Raphael M. Tshimanga 13 Sources et puits d’eau des zones humides de la Cuvette Centrale en utilisant de multiples mesures de télédétection et un modèle hydrologique 245Ting Yuan, Hyongki Lee, R. Edward Beighley, Hahn Chul Jung, et Raphael M. Tshimanga 14 Analyse du rôle de la Cuvette Centrale dans l’hydrologie du bassin versant du Congo 255Pankyes Datok, Clément Fabre, Sabine Sauvage, Guy D. Moukandi N’kaya, Adrien Paris, Vanessa Dos Santos, Alain Laraque, et José-Miguel Sánchez-Pérez 15 Estimation de la bathymétrie pour la modélisation de l’hydraulique des canaux multifilaires : application au cours moyen du fleuve Congo 283Andrew B. Carr, Mark A. Trigg, Raphael M. Tshimanga, Mark W. Smith, Duncan J. Borman, et Paul D. Bates 16 Examen des applications des techniques de télédétection à la recherche hydrologique en Afrique subsaharienne, avec un accent particulier sur le bassin du Congo 303Guy J.-P. Schumann, Delwyn K. Moller, Louise Croneborg-Jones, et Konstantinos M. Andreadis 17 Hydrologie spatiale et applications dans le bassin du Congo 333Christophe Brachet, Alice Andral, Georges Gulemvuga Guzanga, Blaise-Leandre Tondo, Pierre-Olivier Malaterre, et Sebastien Legrand 18 Suivi des variables hydrologiques par télédétection et modélisation dans le basin du fleuve Congo 345Adrien Paris, Stéphane Calmant, Marielle Gosset, Ayan S. Fleischmann, Tainá Sampaio Xavier Conchy, Pierre-André Garambois, Jean-Pierre Bricquet, Fabrice Papa, Raphael M. Tshimanga, Georges Gulemvuga Guzanga, Vinícius Alencar Siqueira, Blaise-Leandre Tondo, Rodrigo Paiva, Joecila Santos da Silva, et Alain Laraque 19 Variations hydrologiques à long terme du bassin de l’Ogooué 375Sakaros Bogning, Fréderic Frappart, Gil Mahé, Fernando Niño, Adrien Paris, Joëlle Sihon, Franck Ghomsi, Fabien Blarel, Jean-Pierre Bricquet, Raphaël Onguene, Jacques Etame, Frédérique Seyler, Marie-Claire Paiz, et Jean-Jacques Braun Partie IV Sédiments et carbone 20 Dynamique du carbone fluvial dans le continuum terre-océan des grands fleuves tropicaux : l’Amazone et le Congo 403Jeffrey E. Richey, Robert G. M. Spencer, Travis W. Drake, et Nicholas D. Ward 21 Mesure des changements géomorphologiques sur le fleuve Congo à l’aide de cartes de navigation centenaires 425Mark A. Trigg, Andrew B. Carr, Mark W. Smith, et Raphael M. Tshimanga 22 Sélection du site, conception et mise en oeuvre d’un programme d’échantillonnage des sédiments sur le fleuve Kasaï, un affluent majeur du fleuve Congo 441Catherine A. Mushi, Preksedis M. Ndomba, Raphael M. Tshimanga, Mark A. Trigg, Jeffrey Neal, Gode B. Bola, Pierre Mulamba Kabuya, Andrew B. Carr, Jules T. Beya, Paul D. Bates, et Felix Mtalo 23 Nouvelles mesures de la dynamique de l’eau et du transport des sédiments le long du bief moyen du fleuve Congo et de la rivière Kasaï 463Raphael M. Tshimanga, Mark A. Trigg, Jeffrey Neal, Preksedis M. Ndomba, Denis A. Hughes, Andrew B. Carr, Pierre Mulamba Kabuya, Gode B. Bola, Catherine A. Mushi, Jules T. Beya, Felly K. Ngandu, Gabriel M. Mokango, Felix Mtalo, et Paul D. Bates Partie V Ressources en eau 24 Vers un cadre de classification des bassins versants pour les prévisions hydrologiques et la gestion des ressources en eau dans le bassin non jaugé du fleuve Congo : une approche a priori 487Raphael M. Tshimanga, Gode B. Bola, Pierre Mulamba Kabuya, Landry Nkaba, Jeffrey Neal, Laurence Hawker, Mark A. Trigg, Paul D. Bates, Denis A. Hughes, Alain Laraque, Ross Woods, et Thorsten Wagener 25 Les enjeux environnementaux du projet de transfert d’eau de l’Oubangui vers le lac Tchad 517Chanel Nzango, Pascal Bartout, Laurent Touchart, et Cyriaque-Rufin Nguimalet 26 Variabilite du lac Tchad : quelle gestion hydraulique pour preserver les ressources naturelles ? 531Hadiza Kiari Fougou et Jacques Lemoalle 27 Evaluation des risques d’inondation à périodes de retour multiples dans le bassin du fleuve Congo 537Gode B. Bola, Raphael M. Tshimanga, Jeffrey Neal, Laurence Hawker, Mark A. Trigg, Lukanda Mwamba, et Paul D. Bates 28 Mettre les usagers de la rivière au coeur de la recherche sur l’hydraulique et la morphologie dans le bassin du Congo 561Mark A. Trigg, Raphael M. Tshimanga, Preksedis M. Ndomba, Felix Mtalo, Denis A. Hughes, Catherine A. Mushi, Gode B. Bola, Pierre Mulamba Kabuya, Andrew B. Carr, Mark Bernhofen, Jeffrey Neal, Jules T. Beya, Felly K. Ngandu, et Paul D. Bates Index 577

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisSTUDY GUIDE FOR Alive and Well at the End of the Day Teaching aid underscoring the principles of effective safety leadership The Second Edition of Alive and Well at the End of the Day provides industrial leaders in operations with practical solutions to the tough safety leadership challenges they must manage. The book describes in detail the nature of those challenges (what makes them that tough) and offers proven best practices to successfully deal with them. The Study Guide is designed as a teaching aid for the Alive and Well book. Created by the highly experienced training specialists of Balmert Consulting, the Study Guide uses training best practices to help affix the concepts of Alive and Well in the minds of professional students. The use of strategically-crafted questionsboth at the beginning and end of each review sessionallows the student to work with the material conceptually, becoming more familiar and facile Table of ContentsTABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 The Leadership Challenge Chapter 2 The Case for Safety Chapter 3 The Practice of Leadership Chapter 4 Moments of High Influence Chapter 5 Managing by Walking Around Chapter 6 Following All the Rules … All the Time Chapter 7 Recognizing Hazards and Managing Risk Chapter 8 Behavior, Consequences—and Attitude! Chapter 9 The Power of Questions Chapter 10 Making Change Happen Chapter 11 Understanding What Went Wrong Chapter 12 Managing Accountability Chapter 13 Managing Safety Suggestions Chapter 14 Safety Meetings Worth Having Chapter 15 Creating the Culture You Want Chapter 16 Investing in Training Chapter 17 Measuring Safety Performance Chapter 18 Managing Safety Dilemmas Chapter 19 Leading From the Middle Chapter 20 Mistakes Managers Make Chapter 21 Driving Execution Chapter 22 Making a Difference

Read more less

Book SynopsisMucoadhesion defined as attachment of synthetic or natural materials to mucosal tissues has been widely exploited in pharmaceutical forms. This multi-author book provides an up-to-date account of current research on mucoadhesive materials and drug delivery systems. The introductory section describes the structure and physiology of various mucosal surfaces (oral, nasal, ocular, gastrointestinal and vaginal mucosa). This is followed by chapters on the various methods used to study mucoadhesion and to characterise mucoadhesive properties of various dosage forms. The final section will summarise information on traditional and novel types of mucoadhesive materials, such as chitosan, thiomers, and liposome-based formulations. This book is unique as there is currently no modern book considering mucoadhesion - all other existing books on the topic are either narrowly focused or more than 10 years old. Furthermore, each contributor offers specialist perspectives from a variety of global locaTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvii Section One Structure and Physiology of Mucosal Surfaces in Relation to Drug Delivery 1 1 Oral Mucosa: Physiological and Physicochemical Aspects 3 Gleb E. Yakubov, Hannah Gibbins, Gordon B. Proctor and Guy H. Carpenter 1.1 Anatomical and Histological Aspects of Oral Cavity Tissues 3 1.2 Production and Composition of Saliva 8 1.3 Surface Architecture, Mechanical, Rheological and Transport Properties of Salivary Pellicle 16 1.4 Future Perspective 27 References 27 2 Anatomy of the Eye and the Role of Ocular Mucosa in Drug Delivery 39 Peter W.J. Morrison and Vitaliy V. Khutoryanskiy 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Anatomy of the Eye 40 2.3 Introduction to Ocular Mucosa 45 2.4 The Role of Ocular Mucosa in Drug Delivery 47 2.5 Models for Ocular Drug Delivery 48 2.6 Recent Advances in Topical Ocular Drug Delivery 51 2.7 Conclusions 55 References 55 3 Drug Delivery Across the Nasal Mucosa 61 Michelle Armstrong, Shonagh Walker, Jenifer Mains and Clive G. Wilson 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Drug Delivery via the Nasal Mucosa 63 3.3 Anatomy and Physiology of the Nasal Cavity 66 3.4 Disease States of the Nasal Cavity 70 3.5 Transport Across the Membrane 73 3.6 Nose-to-Brain Drug Delivery 75 3.7 Conclusion 76 References 76 4 Gastrointestinal Mucosa and Mucus 83 Felipe O. Varum and Abdul W. Basit 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 The Gastrointestinal Mucus 86 4.3 Conclusions 94 References 94 5 Vaginal Mucosa and Drug Delivery 99 José das Neves, Rita Palmeira-de-Oliveira, Ana Palmeira-de-Oliveira, Francisca Rodrigues and Bruno Sarmento 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Drug Delivery and the Human Vagina 100 5.3 Vaginal Drug Dosage Forms 105 5.4 Novel Strategies for Enhanced Vaginal Drug Delivery 110 5.5 Mucoadhesion and the Vaginal Environment 111 5.6 Vaginal Microbicides 114 5.7 Users’ Acceptability and Preferences 116 5.8 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 118 Acknowledgements 118 References 119 Section Two Understanding of Mucoadhesion and Methods of Investigation 133 6 Structure and Properties of Mucins 135 Monica Berry and Anthony Corfield 6.1 Introduction 135 6.2 General Characteristics of Mucins 136 6.3 Mucin Glycosylation – Changes in Disease 139 6.4 Dynamics of Mucin Synthesis and Function 142 6.5 Mucin Gel Formation on Cell Surfaces 143 6.6 Mucin Therapeutics 148 6.7 Polysaccharide Coatings to Enable Probiotic Delivery 149 6.8 Gene Cloning and Drug Delivery 149 6.9 Chemo-Enzymatic Synthesis of O-Glycans for Drug Delivery 149 6.10 Glycan Legislation 150 References 151 7 Theories of Mucoadhesion 159 John D. Smart 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Mucous Membranes 159 7.3 Mucoadhesives 160 7.4 The Adhesive Interaction 160 7.5 Mucoadhesion 162 7.6 Solid Mucoadhesion 162 7.7 Semi-solid Mucoadhesion 168 7.8 Liquid Mucoadhesion 169 7.9 Modified Materials 169 7.10 Conclusions 170 References 170 8 Methods to Study Mucoadhesive Dosage Forms 175 Maya Davidovich-Pinhas and Havazelet Bianco-Peled 8.1 Introduction 175 8.2 Model Surfaces for Mucoadhesion Evaluation 176 8.3 Methods to Evaluate Mucoadhesion Dosage Form 177 8.4 Summary 189 References 189 9 Methods for Assessing Mucoadhesion: The Experience of an Integrative Approach 197 Gleb E. Yakubov, Scott Singleton and Ann-Marie Williamson 9.1 Mucins and Mucosal Architecture 197 9.2 Concept of Length and Time Scales in Mucoadhesion 198 9.3 Experimental Approaches to Measuring Mucosal Interactions 201 9.4 Integrative Approaches. Layer-by-Layer Assembled Multilayers: A Tool for Studying Mucoadhesion 208 9.5 Future Perspective 224 References 225 Section Three Mucoadhesive Materials 233 10 Chitosan 235 Joshua Boateng, Isaac Ayensu and Harshavardhan Pawar 10.1 Introduction 235 10.2 Material and Physicochemical Properties of Chitosan 236 10.3 Applications 240 10.4 Material Characterisation of Bioadhesive Chitosan Formulations 245 10.5 Summary 247 References 247 11 Thiomers 255 Christiane Müller and Andreas Bernkop-Schnürch 11.1 Introduction 255 11.2 Thiolated Polymers 257 11.3 Sulfhydryl Group Contribution 260 11.4 Mechanism of Mucoadhesion 262 11.5 Mucoadhesive Properties 263 11.6 Additional Properties of Thiolated Polymers 264 11.7 Mucoadhesive Dosage Forms Based on Thiomers 267 11.8 Biopharmaceutical Use of Thiomers 269 11.9 Safety and Stability 272 11.10 Conclusion 273 References 273 12 Boronate-Containing Polymers 279 Alexander E. Ivanov 12.1 Introduction 279 12.2 Fundamentals of Borate and Boronate Interactions with Monoand Oligosaccharides 280 12.3 Multipoint Association of BCPs with Polysaccharides 282 12.4 Formation of Interpolymer Complexes of BCPs with Mucin Glycoprotein 284 12.5 Interaction of BCPs with Animal Cells 286 12.6 Polymeric Mucoadhesive Materials and Devices Employing Boronate – Carbohydrate Interactions 289 12.7 Conclusions 291 References 292 13 Liposome-Based Mucoadhesive Formulations 297 Kohei Tahara and Hirofumi Takeuchi 13.1 Introduction 297 13.2 Oral Administration of Surface-Modified Liposomes with the Mucoadhesive Properties 298 13.3 The Behaviour of Liposomes After Oral Administration 300 13.4 Pulmonary Administration of Peptide Drugs with Liposomal Formulations: Effective Surface Modification Using Chitosan or Poly(Vinyl Alcohol) with a Hydrophobic Anchor 301 13.5 Modification of Liposomes Using Mucoadhesive Polymer– Wheat Germ Agglutinin Conjugates for Pulmonary Drug Delivery 304 13.6 Conclusions 306 References 306 14 Acrylated Polymers 309 Maya Davidovich-Pinhas and Havazelet Bianco-Peled 14.1 Introduction 309 14.2 Mucoadhesion 310 14.3 Types of Interactions Involved in the Mucoadhesion Process 310 14.4 Interactions Between Acrylate and Mucin Glycoprotein 311 14.5 Acrylated Alginate (Alginate-PEGAc) 314 14.6 Summary 325 References 325 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisFood proteins are of great interest, not only because of their nutritional importance and their functionality in foods, but also for their detrimental effects.Trade Review“This book reviews the properties of food proteins and provides in-depth information on important plant and animal proteins consumed around the world.” (South African Food Science and Technology, 1 February 2016)Table of ContentsAbout the Editor vii List of Contributors ix Scientific Review Panel xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Part I Protein Properties 1 Introduction to Food Proteins 3Zeynep Ustunol 2 Overview of Food Proteins 5Zeynep Ustunol 3 Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins 11Zeynep Ustunol 4 Physical, Chemical, and Processing-Induced Changes in Proteins 23Zeynep Ustunol 5 Functional Properties of Food Proteins 47Eleana Kristo and Milena Corredig 6 Biologically Active Peptides from Foods 75Fereidoon Shahidi and Quanqaun Li 7 Protein and Peptide-Based Antioxidants 99Roger Nahas and John Weaver 8 Nutritional Aspects of Proteins 113Nathalie Trottier and Ryan Walker Part II Plant Proteins 9 Soy Proteins 141Luis Mojica, Vermont P. Dia, and Elvira Gonz´alez de Mej´ıa 10 Canola/Rapeseed Proteins and Peptides 193Ayyappan Appukuttan Aachary, Usha Thiyam-Hollander, and Michael N.A. Eskin 11 Wheat Proteins 219Ang´ela Juh´asz, Frank B´ek´es, and Colin W. Wrigley 12 Rice Proteins 305Marissa Villafuerte Romero 13 Sorghum and Millet Proteins 323Scott Bean and Brian P. Ioerger Part III Animal Proteins 14 Muscle Proteins 363Iksoon Kang and Pranjal Singh 15 Seafood Proteins and Surimi 393Jae W. Park and Zachary H. Reed 16 Milk Proteins 427Nana Y. Farkye and Nagendra Shah 17 Egg Proteins 459Yoshinori Mine Index 491

Read more less

Book SynopsisA peptidomimetic is a small protein-like chain designed to mimic a peptide with adjusted molecular properties such as enhanced stability or biological activity. It is a very powerful approach for the generation of small-molecule-based drugs as enzyme inhibitors or receptor ligands. Peptidomimetics in Organic and Medicinal Chemistry outlines the concepts and synthetic strategies underlying the building of bioactive compounds of a peptidomimetic nature. Topics covered include the chemistry of unnatural amino acids, peptide- and scaffold-based peptidomimetics, amino acid-side chain isosteres, backbone isosteres, dipeptide isosteres, beta-turn peptidomimetics, proline-mimetics as turn inducers, cyclic scaffolds, amino acid surrogates, and scaffolds for combinatorial chemistry of peptidomimetics. Case studies in the hit-to-lead process, such as the development of integrin ligands and thrombin inhibitors, illustrate the successful application of peptidomimetics in drug discoTable of ContentsPreface xiii Abbreviations xvii PART I The Basics of Peptidomimetics 1 1. The Basics of Peptidomimetics 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Definition and Classification 5 1.3 Strategic Approaches to Peptidomimetic Design 7 1.3.1 Modification of Amino Acids 8 1.3.2 Compounds with Global Restrictions 9 1.3.3 Molecular Scaffolds Mimicking the Peptidic Backbone 10 1.4 Successful Examples of Peptidomimetic Drugs 12 1.4.1 ACE Inhibitors 13 1.4.2 Thrombin Inhibitors 13 1.5 Conclusion 16 References 16 2. Synthetic Approaches towards Peptidomimetic Design 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Local Modifications 20 2.2.1 Single Amino Acid Modifications 23 2.2.2 Dipeptide Isosteres 26 2.2.3 Retro-inverso Peptides 29 2.2.4 N-Methylation of Peptides 30 2.2.5 Azapeptides 31 2.2.6 Peptoids 31 2.3 Global Restrictions through Cyclic Peptidomimetics 32 2.4 Peptidomimetic Scaffolds 34 2.5 Conclusions 35 References 35 PART II Synthetic Methods and Molecules 37 3. Peptidomimetic Bioisosteres 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Peptide Bond Isosteres 40 3.2.1 Thioamides 41 3.2.2 Esters 41 3.2.3 Alkenes and Fluoroalkenes 41 3.2.4 Transition-State Isosteres 42 3.3 Side-Chain Isosteres 45 3.3.1 Guanidine Isosteres in Arginine Peptidomimetics 45 3.3.2 Isosteres of Aspartic Acid and Glutamic Acid 49 3.3.3 Tethered α-Amino Acids: Constraining the χ-Space 53 3.4 Dipeptide Isosteres 59 3.4.1 δ-Amino Acids 63 3.5 Tripeptide Isosteres 67 3.6 Conclusion 68 References 69 4. Solid-Phase Synthesis and Combinatorial Approaches to Peptidomimetics 75 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Solid-Phase Synthesis of Peptidomimetics 76 4.2.1 Scaffolds from α-Amino Acids 76 4.2.2 Scaffolds from Amino Aldehyde Intermediates 85 4.2.3 Pyrrolidine-Containing Scaffolds 89 4.3 Conclusion 94 References 95 5. Click Chemistry: The Triazole Ring as a Privileged Peptidomimetic Scaffold 99 5.1 Introduction 99 5.1.1 CuAAC Reaction 100 5.1.2 Triazole Ring as a Peptidomimetic Isostere 101 5.2 Triazole-Containing Peptidomimetics Elaborated through ‘Click Chemistry’ 102 5.2.1 Macrocycles 102 5.2.2 Oligomers and Foldamers 107 5.3 Relevant Applications in Drug Discovery 110 5.3.1 AChE Inhibitors 110 5.3.2 HIV Protease Inhibitors 111 5.3.3 MMP Inhibitors 114 5.3.4 Integrin Ligands 115 5.4 Conclusions 118 Acknowledgements 119 References 119 6. Peptoids 123 6.1 Introduction and Basics of Peptoids 123 6.2 Synthetic Methods 126 6.3 Macrocyclic Peptoids 129 6.4 Conformational Analysis of Folded Peptoids 130 6.5 Application of Peptoids as Antimicrobial Peptidomimetics 132 6.6 Conclusions 134 References 134 7. Sugar Amino Acids 137 7.1 Introduction 137 7.2 α-SAAs 138 7.2.1 Furanoid α-SAAs 138 7.2.2 Pyranoid α-SAAs 142 7.3 β-SAAs 144 7.3.1 Furanoid β-SAAs 144 7.3.2 Pyranoid β-SAAs 147 7.4 γ-SAAs 148 7.5 δ-SAAs 150 7.5.1 Furanoid δ-SAAs 150 7.5.2 Pyranoid δ-SAAs 154 7.6 Representative Applications in Medicinal Chemistry 159 7.7 Conclusions 162 References 162 8. Cyclic -Amino Acids as Proline Mimetics 165 8.1 Introduction 165 8.2 Cyclic α-Amino Acids 166 8.2.1 3-Substituted Proline Derivatives 167 8.2.2 4-Substituted Proline Derivatives 168 8.2.3 5-Substituted Proline Derivatives 169 8.2.4 Other Heterocyclic Proline Analogues 171 8.3 Bicyclic α-Amino Acids 174 8.3.1 β/γ-Ring Junction 175 8.3.2 α/γ-Ring Junction 178 8.3.3 γ/δ-Ring Junction 179 8.3.4 α/δ-Ring Junction 180 8.3.5 β/δ-Ring Junction 182 8.3.6 N/β-Ring Junction 183 8.3.7 Pipecolic-Based Bicyclic α-Amino Acids 183 8.3.8 Morpholine-Based Bicyclic α-Amino Acids 187 8.4 Conclusions 189 References 189 9. -Turn Peptidomimetics 191 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Definition and Classification of β-Turns 192 9.3 Conformational Analysis 194 9.4 β-Turn Peptidomimetics 196 9.4.1 Proline Analogues in β-Turn Peptidomimetics 197 9.4.2 δ-Amino Acids as Reverse-Turn Inducers 200 9.4.3 Molecular Scaffolds as β-Turn Peptidomimetics 209 9.5 Conclusions 214 References 215 10. Peptidomimetic Foldamers 219 10.1 Introduction 219 10.2 Classification 220 10.3 Peptoids 221 10.4 β-Peptides: First Systematic Conformational Studies 221 10.5 Hybrid Foldamers 226 10.6 From Structural to Functional Foldamers 227 10.6.1 Peptoids as Foldameric Antimicrobial Peptidomimetics 227 10.6.2 Foldamers Targeting Bcl-xL Antiapoptotic Proteins 227 10.7 Conclusions 228 References 228 PART III Applications in Medicinal Chemistry 231 11. Case Study 1: Peptidomimetic HIV Protease Inhibitors 233 11.1 Introduction 233 11.2 The HIV-1 Virus 233 11.2.1 HIV-1 Protease 234 11.3 Antiretroviral Therapy 238 11.4 Drug Resistance 239 11.4.1 Mechanisms of Resistance to Protease Inhibitors 239 11.5 HIV-1 Protease Inhibitors 240 11.5.1 Transition-State Analogues 240 11.5.2 Peptidomimetic Drugs 241 11.5.3 Next-Generation Cyclic Peptidomimetic Inhibitors 245 11.6 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgements 255 References 256 12. Case Study 2: Peptidomimetic Ligands for Integrin 259 12.1 Introduction 259 12.2 Peptide-Based Peptidomimetic Integrin Ligands 262 12.3 Scaffold-Based Peptidomimetic Integrin Ligands 270 12.4 Conclusions 280 References 280 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe development of materials for clean and efficient energy generation and storage is one of the most rapidly developing, multi-disciplinary areas of contemporary science, driven primarily by concerns over global warming, diminishing fossil-fuel reserves, the need for energy security, and increasing consumer demand for portable electronics.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xi List of Contributors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Computational Techniques 1 C. Richard A. Catlow, Alexey A. Sokol, and Aron Walsh 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Atomistic Simulations 1 1.2.1 Basic Concepts 1 1.2.2 Parameterization 3 1.2.3 Parameter Sets 3 1.2.4 Implementation 4 1.3 Electronic Structure Techniques 6 1.3.1 Wavefunction Methods 8 1.3.1.1 Hartree–Fock Theory 9 1.3.1.2 Post-Hartree–Fock Approaches 10 1.3.1.3 Semi-empirical Wavefunction Methods 11 1.3.2 Density Functional Theory 12 1.3.2.1 Exchange–Correlation Functionals 12 1.3.2.2 Semi-empirical Density Functional Approaches 14 1.3.3 Excited States 15 1.4 Multiscale Approaches 15 1.4.1 Hybrid QM/MM Embedding Techniques 16 1.4.2 Beyond Atomistic Models 17 1.5 Boundary Conditions 19 1.6 Point-Defect Simulations 21 1.6.1 Mott–Littleton Approach 21 1.6.2 Periodic Supercell Approach 24 1.7 Summary 25 References 25 2 Energy Generation: Solar Energy 29 Silvana Botti and Julien Vidal 2.1 Thin-Film Photovoltaics 29 2.2 First-Principles Methods for Electronic Excitations 32 2.2.1 Hedin’s Equations and the GW Approximation 34 2.2.2 Hybrid Functionals 38 2.2.3 Bethe–Salpeter Equation 40 2.2.4 Model Kernels for TDDFT 41 2.3 Examples of Applications 42 2.3.1 Cu-Based Thin-Film Absorbers 43 2.3.2 Delafossite Transparent Conductive Oxides 54 2.4 Conclusions 60 References 61 3 Energy Generation: Nuclear Energy 71 Dorothy Duffy 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Radiation Effects in Nuclear Materials 72 3.2.1 Fission 72 3.2.1.1 Structural Materials 73 3.2.1.2 Fuel 76 3.2.1.3 Cladding 79 3.2.2 Fusion 80 3.2.2.1 Structural Materials 81 3.2.2.2 Plasma-Facing Materials 82 3.2.3 Waste Disposal 83 3.3 Modeling Radiation Effects 85 3.3.1 BCA Modeling 86 3.3.2 Molecular Dynamics 87 3.3.2.1 Cascade Simulations 87 3.3.2.2 Sputtering Simulations 93 3.3.3 Monte Carlo Simulations 94 3.3.3.1 Kinetic Monte Carlo 95 3.3.3.2 Object Kinetic Monte Carlo 96 3.3.3.3 Transition Rates 97 3.3.3.4 Examples 98 3.3.4 Cluster Dynamics 99 3.3.4.1 Examples 99 3.3.4.2 Comparison with OKMC 100 3.3.5 Density Functional Theory 101 3.3.5.1 Interatomic Potentials 101 3.3.5.2 Transition Rates 102 3.4 Summary and Outlook 102 References 104 4 Energy Storage: Rechargeable Lithium Batteries 109 M. Saiful Islam and Craig A.J. Fisher 4.1 Introduction 109 4.2 Overview of Computational Approaches 110 4.3 Li–Ion Batteries 112 4.4 Cell Voltages and Structural Phase Stability 113 4.5 Li–Ion Diffusion and Defect Properties 116 4.6 Surfaces and Morphology 121 4.7 Current Trends and Future Directions 124 4.8 Concluding Remarks 125 References 125 5 Energy Storage: Hydrogen 131 Viet-Duc Le and Yong-Hyun Kim 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Computational Approach in Hydrogen Storage Research 133 5.3 Chemisorption Approach 133 5.4 Physisorption Approach 136 5.5 Spillover Approach 138 5.6 Kubas-Type Approach 138 5.7 Conclusion 145 References 146 6 Energy Conversion: Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 149 E.A. Kotomin, R. Merkle, Y.A. Mastrikov, M.M. Kuklja, and J. Maier 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Computational Details 152 6.3 Cathode Materials and Reactions 155 6.3.1 Surfaces: LaMnO3 and (La,Sr)MnO3 Perovskites 155 6.3.1.1 Surface Termination, Surface Point Defects 155 6.3.1.2 Oxygen Adsorption and Diffusion 158 6.3.1.3 Rate-Determining Step of the Surface Reaction 160 6.3.2 Bulk Properties of Multicomponent Perovskites 164 6.3.2.1 Oxygen Vacancy Formation in (Ba,Sr)(Co,Fe)O3−δ 164 6.3.2.2 Oxygen Vacancy Migration in (Ba,Sr)(Co,Fe)O3−δ 167 6.3.2.3 Disorder and Cation Rearrangement in (Ba,Sr)(Co,Fe)O3−δ 170 6.3.3 Defects in (La,Sr)(Co,Fe)O3−δ 173 6.4 Ion Transport in Electrolytes: Recent Studies 175 6.5 Reactions at SOFC Anodes 176 6.6 Conclusions 177 Acknowledgments 178 References 178 7 Energy Conversion: Heterogeneous Catalysis 187 Rutger A. van Santen, Evgeny A. Pidko, and Emiel J.M. Hensen 7.1 Introduction 187 7.1.1 Particle Size Dependence of Catalytic Reactivity 191 7.1.2 Activity and Selectivity as a Function of the Metal Type 192 7.1.3 Reactivity as a Function of State of the Surface 193 7.1.4 Mechanism of Acid Catalysis: Single Site versus Dual Site 193 7.2 Basic Concepts of Heterogeneous Catalysis 195 7.3 Surface Sensitivity in CH Activation 198 7.3.1 Homolytic Activation of CH Bonds 198 7.3.2 Heterolytic Activation of CH Bonds 203 7.3.2.1 Brønsted Acid Catalysis 204 7.3.2.2 Lewis Acid Catalysis 206 7.4 Surface Sensitivity for the C−C Bond Formation 209 7.4.1 Transition Metal Catalyzed FT Reaction 209 7.4.2 C−C Bond Formation Catalyzed by Zeolitic Brønsted Acids 213 7.5 Structure and Surface Composition Sensitivity: Oxygen Insertion versus CH Bond Cleavage 217 7.5.1 Silver-Catalyzed Ethylene Epoxidation 217 7.5.2 Benzene Oxidation by Iron-Modified Zeolite 221 7.6 Conclusion 223 References 224 8 Energy Conversion: Solid-State Lighting 231 E. Kioupakis, P. Rinke, A. Janotti, Q. Yan, and C.G. Van de Walle 8.1 Introduction to Solid-State Lighting 231 8.2 Structure and Electronic Properties of Nitride Materials 234 8.2.1 Density Functional Theory and Ground-State Properties 234 8.2.2 Electronic Excitations: GW and Exact Exchange 236 8.2.3 Electronic Excitations: Hybrid Functionals 240 8.2.4 Band-gap Bowing and Band Alignments 240 8.2.5 Strain and Deformation Potentials 241 8.3 Defects in Nitride Materials 243 8.3.1 Methodology 244 8.3.2 Example: C in GaN 246 8.4 Auger Recombination and Efficiency Droop Problem of Nitride LEDs 248 8.4.1 Efficiency Droop 248 8.4.2 Auger Recombination 249 8.4.3 Computational Methodology 251 8.4.4 Results 252 8.5 Summary 254 Acknowledgments 255 References 255 9 Toward the Nanoscale 261 Phuti E. Ngoepe, Rapela R. Maphanga, and Dean C. Sayle 9.1 Introduction 261 9.2 Review of Simulation Methods 263 9.2.1 Established Computational Methods 263 9.2.2 Evolutionary Methods 263 9.2.2.1 GM Methods 263 9.2.2.2 Amorphization and Recrystallization 264 9.3 Applications 266 9.3.1 Nanoclusters 266 9.3.1.1 ZnO 266 9.3.1.2 ZnS 268 9.3.1.3 MnO2 269 9.3.1.4 TiO2 271 9.3.2 Nanoarchitectures 272 9.3.2.1 MnO2 Nanoparticle (Nucleation and Crystallization) 272 9.3.2.2 MnO2 Bulk 275 9.3.2.3 MnO2 Nanoporous 278 9.3.2.4 TiO2 Nanoporous 284 9.3.2.5 ZnS and ZnO Nanoporous 286 9.4 Summary and Conclusion 289 Acknowledgments 290 References 290 Further Reading 295 Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Handbook is a compilation of 99 articles on diverse reagents and catalysts that describe the synthesis of heteroarenes, the building blocks of a wide range of chemicals used in pharma and chemical industries. Articles are selected from thee-EROS databaseand edited to make sure that it includes only the material relevant to the topic of the book and focus on the synthetic aspects. This makes the articles very focused on the needs of readers wanting information on specific syntheses of specific heteroarenes. In addition, the chemistry of each ?parent heteroarene? is also included to ensure that the reader rapidly finds important information. The Handbook is a part of the Handbook of Reagents for Organic Chemistry series, aiming at collecting articles on a particular theme that individual researchers in academia or industry can use on a daily basis.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi Recent Review Articles and Monographs xiii Short Note on InChIs and InChIKeys xvii Acetaldoxime 1 Acetone Hydrazone 7 Acetonitrile 11 Acetonitrile N-Oxide 18 N-Aminophthalimide 19 1-Amino-pyridinium iodide 24 Ammonium Nitrate 27 Ammonium Acetate 29 Ammonium Bicarbonate 30 Benzonitrile N-Oxide 33 Benzoyl Isothiocyanate 36 N-[Bis(methylthio)methylene]-p-toluenesulfonamide 37 Bromoacetone 47 1-tert-Butyloxycarbonyl-1-methylhydrazine 52 2-Chloro-1,3-dimethylimidazolinium chloride 57 Copper(I) Chloride 61 Copper(II) Chloride 75 Copper(I) Iodide 83 Copper(II) Sulfate 93 Copper(II) Trifluoromethanesulfonate 104 Cyclopentadienylbis(triphenylphosphine)cobalt(I) 115 (Diacetoxyiodo)benzene 119 Diaminomaleonitrile 128 Diazo(trimethylsilyl)methyllithium 129 Dibromoformaldehyde Oxime 135 Dichloro Bis(acetonitrile) Palladium 137 Dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)-palladium(II) 142 Di-𝜇-chlorodichlorobis[(1,2,3,4,5-𝜂)-1,2,-3,4,5- pentamethyl-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl]diiridium 146 2,3-Dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone 172 Dichloroformaldehyde Oxime 184 Dichlorotris(triphenylphosphine)ruthenium(II) 186 (Diethoxyphosphoryl)acetonitrile oxide 191 Diethyl Oxalate 192 2,2-Difluoroethylamine 195 Diiminosuccinonitrile 199 1,3-Diisopropyl-1,3-propanedione 200 2,5-Dimethoxytetrahydrofuran 203 N,N-Dimethylacetamide Dimethyl Acetal 208 Dimethyl Diazomalonate 215 Dimethyl 2,3-Pentadienedioate 230 Dimethyl 1,2,4,5-Tetrazine-3,6-dicarboxylate 236 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine 244 Diphenyl Cyanocarbonimidate 247 Dirhodium(II) Tetraacetate 249 Dirhodium Tetrakis(heptafluorobutyramide) 265 Di-p-tolylcarbodiimide 267 Ethyl 2-Diazo-3-oxo-3-phenylpropanoate 273 Ethyl 2-Diazo-3-oxybutyrate 275 Ethyl 2-Diazo-4,4,4-trifluoro-3-oxobutanoate 281 Ethyl Ethoxymethylenecyanoacetate 284 Formamidine Acetate 289 Gold(I) Chloride 291 Gold(III) Chloride 298 Guanidine 322 2,5-Hexanedione 327 Hydrogen Sulfide 330 Hydroxylamine 335 Indium Tribromide 343 Iodine 358 Iron(III) Bromide 374 Iron(III) Chloride 379 Malonyl Chloride 387 𝛼-Methacrolein N-tert-Butylimine 389 Methyl glycine 390 Methyl Isocyanate 393 S-Methylisothiourea 395 4-Methyloxazole 397 Methyl Thioglycolate 398 Oxo(trimanganese) Heptaacetate 401 Oxygen 402 Palladium(II) Acetate 415 Palladium(II) Chloride 449 Phenyl Isocyanide 467 Phenylhydrazine 468 Phenyliodine(III) Bis(trifluoroacetate) 472 Phosphorus Oxychloride 481 Pivalic Acid 489 Polyphosphoric Acid 497 Potassium Ethyl Xanthate 503 Potassium Monoperoxysulfate 512 Selenium(IV) Oxide 531 Semicarbazide 542 Silver(I) Hexafluoroantimonate 547 Sodium Nitrite 550 Sodium Sulfide 561 Sodium Tetrachloroaurate(III) 573 Sulfur 577 N,N,N’,N’-Tetrabromobenzene-1,3-disulfonamide (TBBDS) 583 Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)-palladium(0) 585 3-Thiapentanedioic acid 594 Thiourea 596 o-Tolyl Isocyanide 598 p-Tolylsulfonylmethyl isocyanide 599 Trifluomethyldiazomethane 607 Trifluoroethylamine 612 Trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride 616 1,1,1-Trifluoro-N-phenylmethanesulfenamide 633 2-(Trimethylsilyl)phenyl Triflate 635 Triphenylphosphinegold(I) Chloride 638 List of Contributors 000 Reagent Formula Index 000 Subject Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisReduction and oxidation processes are at the heart of almost all synthetic procedures and organic chemists are keen to have a huge portfolio of slick and modern catalytic reagents performing oxidations or reductions. This new volume is part of the Handbook for Reagents for Organic Synthesis series, making use of the leading reagent database e-EROS.Table of ContentsPreface xi Introduction xiii Terminal Oxidants Finder xv Oxidation Catalyst Finder xix Recent Review Articles and Monographs xxv Short Note on InChIs and InChIKeys xxvii 4-Acetamido-2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxyl 1 4-Acetylamino-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine-1-oxoammonium Tetrafluoroborate 2 Bathocuproine 15 Bathophenanthroline 17 Benzenecarboperoxoic acid, 1, 1-dimethylethyl Ester 20 1,2-Benziodoxol-3(1H)-one, 1-Hydroxy, 1-Oxide, IBX 32 1,2-Benziodoxol-3(1H)-one, 1-Hydroxy, 1-Oxide, stabilized (stabilized IBX) 44 1,4-Benzoquinone 49 cis-4-Benzyloxy-α,α-bis-(3,5-dimethylphenyl)-Lprolinol (2S,4R)- 52 2,2_-Bipyrrolidines, (2S,2_S) and (2R,2_R) 54 2-[Bis-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)Phenyl] [(trimethylsilyl)oxy]Methyl]Pyrrolidine 57 2,2-Bis[2-[4(S)-tert-butyl-1,3-oxazolinyl]]propane 59 Bis[[(1R,1__R)-3,3__-[(1R,2R)-1,2-cyclohexanediylbis [(nitrilo-κN)methylidyne]]bis[2_-phenyl[1,1_- binaphthalen]-2-olato-κO]](2-)]di-μ-oxodi-titanium and Bis[[(1S,1__S)-3,3__-[(1S,2S)-1,2- cyclohexanediylbis[(nitrilo-κN)methylidyne]]bis [2_-phenyl[1,1_-binaphthalen]-2-olato-κO]](2-)]di- μ-oxodi-titanium 66 Bis(2,2-dimethylpropanoato - κ-O)phenyl-iodine 69 Bis(1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) Peroxide 77 1,2-Bis(phenylsulfinyl)ethane 79 N,N_-Bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)imidazol-2-ylidene Palladium(I) Allyl Chloride 82 Bis(trimethylsilyl) Peroxide 87 Bromamine-T 91 N-tert-Butyl-N-chlorocyanamide 94 tert-Butyl Hydroperoxide 96 tert-Butyl Hypochlorite 126 tert-Butyl Peracetate 132 Calcium Hypochlorite 137 Chloramine-T 142 Chlorobenzene 150 Chloro[N,N_-ethylenebis(salicylideneaminato)] manganese 152 Chromium(VI) Oxide 157 Chromyl Acetate 163 Cobalt, [5,10,15,20-tetraphenyl-21H,23Hporphinato( 2−)-κN 21,κN 22,κN 23,κN 24]- 167 Cumyl Hydroperoxide 171 N,N_-(1R,2R)-1,2-Cyclohexanediylbis- [N-hydroxy-α-phenybenzeneacetamide] 179 1,5-Diaza-cis-decalin 183 N,N-Dibromobenzenesulfonamide and N,N-Dibromo-p-toluenesulfonamide 188 Di-μ-chlorobis(1,5-cyclooctadiene)diiridium(I) 195 Di-μ-chlorodichlorobis[(1,2,3,4,5-η)-1,2,-3,4,5- pentamethyl-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl]diiridium 202 (R)-2,10-Dichloro-5H-dinaphtho[2,1-g: 1,2-i][1,5]dioxacycloundecin-3,6,9(7h)-trione 210 Dichloro(ethoxy)oxovanadium(V) 213 1,1_-Difluoro-2,2_-bipyridinium Bis-(tetrafluoroborate) 217 1,2:4,5-Di-O-isopropylidene-β-d-erythro-hexo-2,3- diulo-2,6-pyranose 221 Di-μ-methoxobis(1,5-cyclooctadiene)diiridium(I) 224 Dimethyldioxirane 228 (S,S)-2,2_-(Dimethylmethylene)bis(4-tert-butyl-2- oxazoline) and (R,R)-2,2_-(Dimethylmethylene)bis- (4-tert-butyl- 2-oxazoline) 234 Dispiro[2H-pyran-2,4_-[4H-5,6,8b]triazaacenaphthylene- 7_(5_H),2__-[2H]pyran], 1_,2_,2_a,3,3_,3__,4,4__,5,5__, 6,6__,8_,8_a-tetradecahydro-1_,2_-dimethoxy-6,6__- dimethyl-, monohydrochloride, (1_S,2R,2_S,2__R, 2_aS,6S,6__S,8_aS)- 257 N-fluoro-N-(phenylsulfonyl)-benzenesulfonamide 259 N-Fluoropyridinium Tetrafluoroborate 270 N-Fluoropyridinium Triflate 272 1-Fluoro-2,4,6-trimethylpyridinium Tetrafluoroborate 274 1-Fluoro-2,4,6-trimethylpyridinium Trifluoromethanesulfonate 278 Hydrogen Peroxide 281 Hydrogen Peroxide–Urea 295 N-Hydroxyphthalimide 307 Iodine 317 2-Iodobenzenesulfonic Acid 332 Iodosylbenzene 338 Iridium, [N-[(1R,2R)-2-(amino-κN)-cyclohexyl]-4- methylbenzenesulfonamidato-κN]chloro[(1,2,3,4,5-η)- 1,2,3,4,5-pentamethyl-2,4,- cyclopentadien-1-yl]-; Iridium, [N-[(1R,2R)-2-(amino-κN)- cyclohexyl]-4- methylbenzenesulfonamidato-κN]chloro[(1,2,3,4,5-η)- 1,2,3,4,5-pentamethyl-2,4,-cyclopentadien-1-yl]-; Iridium, [N-[(1S,2S)-2-(amino-κN)cyclohexyl]-4- methylbenzenesulfonamidato-κN]-chloro [(1,2,3,4,5-η)-1,2,3,4,5-pentamethyl-2,4,- cyclopentadien-1-yl]- 354 Iridium, Dichlorodi-μ-hydrobis[(1,2,3,4,5-η)- 1,2,3,4,5-pentamethyl-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl]di- 357 Iron, Bis(pyridine)bis(2-pyridinecarboxylato-N1,O2) 359 Lithium Hydroperoxide 363 Manganese(III) Acetate 367 Manganese(II), bis(octahydro-1,4,7-trimethyl-1H-1,4,7- triazonine-κN1,κN4,κN7)tri-μ-oxodi-, hexafluorophosphate 375 Manganese(II) tetraphenylporphyrin 378 9-Mesityl-10-methylacridinium Perchlorate 381 N-Methylmorpholine N-Oxide 384 (S)-(−)-4-(2-Methylpropyl)-2-(2-pyridyl)-2-oxazoline 388 Methyl(trifluoromethyl)dioxirane 390 Methyltrioxorhenium 396 Molybdenum Chloride Oxide 407 Noyori Oxidation (Sodium Tungstate Dihydrate, Hydrogen Peroxide, Methyltri-n-octylammonium Hydrogen Sulfate, Phosphonic Acid) 411 3,3_,3α,3α _,4,4_,5,5_-Octahydro-3,3,3_,3_-tetraisopropyl- 6,6_-spirobi-[6H-cyclopent[c]isoxazole] 415 4,4,4_,4_,5,5,5_,5_-Octamethyl-2,2_-bi-1,3,2-dioxaborolane 421 Osmium Tetroxide 433 μ-Oxo-bis[tetrakis(t-butyl)-phthalocyaninatoiron(III)] 452 Oxygen 454 Palladium (II) Sparteine Dichloride 467 Peracetic Acid 470 (8α,9R)-(8__ α,9__R)-1,1__-[1,3-Phenylene-bis(methylene)] bis[9-hydroxy-cinchonanium] Dibromide and (9S)-(9__S)-1,1__-[1,3-Phenylene-bis(methylene)] bis[9-hydroxy-cinchonanium]Dibromide 478 (−)(1S)-1-Phenylethyl Hydroperoxide and (+)(1R)-1-Phenylethyl Hydroperoxide 480 (8α,9R)-(8__ α,9__R)-9,9__-[1,4-Phthalazinediylbis(oxy)] bis[10,11-dihydro-6_-methoxycinchonan] & (9S)-(9__S)-9,9__-[1,4-Phthalazinediylbis(oxy)] bis[10,11-dihydro-6_-methoxycinchonan] 483 Picolinic Acid 495 Polyaniline 498 Potassium Bromate 502 Potassium Monoperoxysulfate 506 2-Pyrazinecarboxylic Acid 524 2,3-Pyrazinedicarboxylic Acid 530 Pyrrolidine, 3,4-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1- (phenylmethyl)-,(3R,4R) and Pyrrolidine, 3,4-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1-(phenylmethyl)-, (3S,4S) 532 2-Pyrrolidinemethanol-α,α-bis(3,5-dimethylphenyl)- (2S); and 2-Pyrrolidine-methanol-α,α-bis(3,5- dimethylphenyl)-(2R) 535 Rhenium(VII) Oxide 541 [RuCl2(p-cymene)2]2 546 Ruthenium(III) Chloride 549 Ruthenium Complex of N,N_,N_-Trimethyl-1,4,7-triazacyclononane and Ruthenium Complex of cis-Diaquabis (6,6_-Dichloro-2,2_-bipyridine) 561 Ruthenium Dodecacarbonyltri Triangulo 565 Ruthenium Hydroxide 568 Selenium(IV) Oxide 575 Sodium Bromate 583 Sodium Hypochlorite 587 Sodium Hypochlorite–N,N_-Bis(3,5-di-tertbutylsalicylidene)- 1,2-cyclohexanediaminomanganese( III) Chloride 600 Spiro[6H-1,3-dioxolo[4,5-c]pyran-6,5_-oxazolidine]-3_- carboxylic acid, tetrahydro-2,2-dimethyl-2_,7- dioxo-,2-methyl-2-propyl ester, (3aR, 5_S, 7aR)- 604 Tetrabutylammonium Bis(pyrazinecarboxylato)- dioxo-vanadium(V) 609 Tetrabutylammonium Dodecatungstophosphate 611 Tetrabutylammonium Peroxydisulfate 615 5,6,7,8-Tetrafluoro-1-hydroxy-1-oxobenziodoxol- 3(1H)one (Tetrafluoro-IBX) 618 2,2,6,6-Tetramethylpiperidin-1-oxyl 620 Tetra-n-propylammonium Perruthenate 626 3,3_,5,5_-Tetra-tert-butyldiphenoquinone 630 (S)-2-(5-1H-Tetrazolyl)pyrrolidine and (R)-2-(5-1H-Tetrazolyl)pyrrolidine 633 4,4_,4__-tri-tert-butyl-2,2_:6_,2__-terpyridine 639 Trichloroisocyanuric Acid 642 Trifluoroperacetic Acid 649 Trimethylamine N-Oxide 659 Triphenylmethyl Hydroperoxide 667 Tris(2-pyridylmethyl)amine 670 Tris[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]phosphine 677 Vanadium,bis[N-[(1S)-1-(carboxy-κO)ethyl]-N- (hydroxy-κO)-l-alaninato(2-)-κN,κO]- 681 Vanadyl Bis(acetylacetonate) 684 List of Contributors 693 Reagent Formula Index 707 Subject Index 711

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe need for chemical processes to be safe, energy efficient, and environmentally benign poses new challenges for chemical engineers. This book examines the newest technologies for sustainable development in chemical engineering, through careful analysis of the technical aspects, and discussion of the possible fields of industrial development.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xv 1. Sustainable Development Strategies: An Overview 1 Vincenzo Piemonte, Marcello De Falco, and Angelo Basile 1.1 Renewable Energies: State of the Art and Diffusion 1 1.2 Process Intensification 4 1.3 Concept and Potentialities of Bio-based Platforms for Biomolecule Production 8 1.4 Soil and Water Remediation 13 Acknowledgement 18 References 18 2. Innovative Solar Technology: CSP Plants for Combined Production of Hydrogen and Electricity 25 Marcello De Falco 2.1 Principles 25 2.2 Plant Configurations 28 2.3 Mathematical Models 33 2.4 Plant Simulations 39 2.5 Conclusions 46 Nomenclature 47 References 48 3. Strategies for Increasing Electrical Energy Production from Intermittent Renewables 51 Alessandro Franco 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Penetration of Renewable Energies into the Electricity Market and Issues Related to Their Development: Some Interesting Cases 55 3.3 An Approach to Expansion of RES and Efficiency Policy in an Integrated Energy System 57 3.4 Analysis of Possible Interesting Scenarios for Increasing Penetration of RES 62 3.5 Analysis of a Meaningful Case Study: The Italian Scenario 66 3.6 Analysis and Discussion 74 3.7 Conclusions 75 Nomenclature and Abbreviations 76 References 77 4. The Smart Grid as a Response to Spread the Concept of Distributed Generation 81 Yi Ding, Jacob Østergaard, Salvador Pineda Morente, and Qiuwei Wu 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Present Electric Power Generation Systems 82 4.3 A Future Electrical Power Generation System with a High Penetration of Distributed Generation and Renewable Energy Resources 83 4.4 Integration of DGs into Smart Grids for Balancing Power 86 4.5 The Bornholm System – A “Fast Track” for Smart Grids 91 4.6 Conclusions 92 References 93 5. Process Intensification in the Chemical Industry: A Review 95 Stefano Curcio 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Different Approaches to Process Intensification 96 5.3 Process Intensification as a Valuable Tool for the Chemical Industry 97 5.4 PI Exploitation in the Chemical Industry 100 5.5 Conclusions 113 References 113 6. Process Intensification in the Chemical and Petrochemical Industry 119 Angelo Basile, Adolfo Iulianelli, and Simona Liguori 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Process Intensification 120 6.3 The Membrane Role 122 6.4 Membrane Reactor 124 6.5 Applications of Membrane Reactors in the Petrochemical Industry 128 6.6 Process Intensification in Chemical Industry 139 6.7 Future Trends 141 6.8 Conclusion 142 Nomenclature 143 References 143 7. Production of Bio-Based Fuels: Bioethanol and Biodiesel 153 Sudip Chakraborty, Ranjana Das Mondal, Debolina Mukherjee, and Chiranjib Bhattacharjee 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Production of Bioethanol 155 7.3 Biodiesel and Renewable Diesels from Biomass 166 7.4 Perspective 172 List of Acronyms 172 References 173 8. Inside the Bioplastics World: An Alternative to Petroleum-based Plastics 181 Vincenzo Piemonte 8.1 Bioplastic Concept 181 8.2 Bioplastic Production Processes 183 8.3 Bioplastic Environmental Impact: Strengths and Weaknesses 186 8.4 Conclusions 195 Acknowledgements 196 References 196 9. Biosurfactants 199 Maria Giovanna Martinotti, Gianna Allegrone, Massimo Cavallo, and Letizia Fracchia 9.1 Introduction 199 9.2 State of the Art 200 9.3 Production Technologies 205 9.4 Recovery of Biosurfactants 212 9.5 Application Fields 213 9.6 Future Prospects 225 References 225 10. Bioremediation of Water: A Sustainable Approach 241 Sudip Chakraborty, Jaya Sikder, Debolina Mukherjee, Mrinal Kanti Mandal, and D. Lawrence Arockiasamy 10.1 Introduction 241 10.2 State-of-the-Art: Recent Development 242 10.3 Water Management 247 10.4 Overview of Bioremediation in Wastewater Treatment and Ground Water Contamination 250 10.5 Membrane Separation in Bioremediation 252 10.6 Case Studies 256 10.7 Conclusions 260 List of Acronyms 261 References 262 11. Effective Remediation of Contaminated Soils by Eco-Compatible Physical, Biological, and Chemical Practices 267 Filomena Sannino and Alessandro Piccolo 11.1 Introduction 267 11.2 Biological Methods (Microorganisms, Plants, Compost, and Biochar) 269 11.3 Physicochemical Methods 277 11.4 Chemical Methods 280 11.5 Conclusions 286 List of Symbols and Acronyms 288 Acknowledgments 289 References 289 12. Nanoparticles as a Smart Technology for Remediation 297 Giuseppe Chidichimo, Daniela Cupelli, Giovanni De Filpo, Patrizia Formoso, and Fiore Pasquale Nicoletta 12.1 Introduction 297 12.2 Silica Nanoparticles for Wastewater Treatment 298 12.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles: Synthesis, Characterization and Applications 305 12.4 Titania Nanoparticles in Environmental Photo-Catalysis 317 12.5 Future Prospects: Is Nano Really Good for the Environment? 326 12.6 Conclusions 328 List of Abbreviations 328 References 329 Index 349

Read more less

Book SynopsisAgricultural and Food Electroanalysis offers a comprehensive rationale of electroanalysis, revealing its enormous potential in agricultural food analysis. A unique approach is used which fills a gap in the literature by bringing in applications to everyday problems.Trade Review"This book can surely provide an excellent overview of the current state of art of electrochemical applications in the ambit of food and beverage analyses. In addition, this work is a valuable resource for scientists studying the evolution of instruments and the consequent introduction of new concepts and improved systems." (Analytical and Bioanalytical Chemistry, 2016)Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xix 1. Electroanalysis and Food Analysis 1Paloma Yá˜nez-Sede˜no and José M. Pingarrón 1.1 Introduction and Adequacy of Electroanalysis for Food Analysis 1 1.2 Methodologies Related to Measurement Techniques 2 1.2.1 Continuous Detection Methods 2 1.2.2 Stripping Analysis 5 1.2.3 Potentiometry and Chronopotentiometry 7 1.2.4 Electronic Tongues 7 1.2.5 Impedance Spectroscopy 9 1.3 Electrochemical Sensors and Biosensors for Food Components 9 1.3.1 Molecularly Imprinted Electrodes 9 1.3.2 Enzyme Biosensors 10 1.3.3 Affinity Biosensors 12 1.4 Nanomaterials for Electrochemical Analysis of Food 14 1.5 Future Trends 16 Acknowledgments 16 References 16 Part I Electroanalytical Techniques in Batch and Continuous Systems in Food Analysis 21 2. Voltammetric Techniques 23Sandra Mendoza, Erika Bustos, Juan Manr´ýquez and Luis A. God´ýnez 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 An Overview of Sweep Potential Electrochemical Techniques 23 2.2.1 Linear Sweep Voltammetry/Cyclic Voltammetry 25 2.2.2 Pulse Voltammetry Techniques 27 2.2.3 Normal Pulse Voltammetry 27 2.2.4 Differential Pulse Voltammetry 28 2.2.5 Square Wave Voltammetry 28 2.2.6 Stripping Voltammetry 29 2.3 Applications of Voltammetric Techniques in Food Analysis 31 2.3.1 Food Contaminants: Heavy Metals, Pesticides, and Toxic Substances 31 2.3.2 Trace Essential Elements 35 2.3.3 Food Additives 35 2.3.4 Nutraceuticals: Phenolic Acids, Flavonoids, and Others 40 2.4 Concluding Remarks 44 Abbreviations 44 References 44 3. Flow-Injection Analysis with Electrochemical Detection 49Fabiana Silva Felix and Lúcio Angnes 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Screening the Literature 51 3.3 Voltammetry under Flowing Stream 52 3.4 Flow Injection Analysis Principles 52 3.4.1 Liquid Propulsion in FIA 54 3.4.2 Methods of Sample Introduction in an FIA System 56 3.4.3 Flow Cell Designs 57 3.5 Batch Injection Analysis Principles 58 3.6 Sequential Injection Analysis Principles 60 3.7 Applications 61 3.7.1 FIA and Voltammetric Detection–A Happy Marriage 61 3.7.2 BIA with Voltammetric Detection 64 3.7.3 SIA with Voltammetric Detection 65 3.8 Advantages of Voltammetry under Flowing Stream 66 3.9 Concluding Remarks 67 Acknowledgments 67 References 67 4. HPLC Techniques with Electrochemical Detection 73Manuel Chicharro Santamar´ýa, Mónica Moreno Barambio and Alberto Sánchez Arribas 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Fundamentals 75 4.2.1 Electrochemical Cell 75 4.2.1.1 Electrode Materials 76 4.2.1.2 Flow-Cell Designs 77 4.2.1.3 Operation Modes 80 4.2.2 Development of HPLC-ED Methods 85 4.2.2.1 Getting Started 86 4.2.2.2 Hydrodynamic Voltammograms 86 4.2.2.3 Mobile Phase Composition 87 4.2.2.4 Temperature 89 4.2.2.5 Flow Rate 90 4.2.2.6 Electrode Treatment 90 4.2.2.7 Gradient Elution 91 4.2.2.8 Maintenance of HPLC-ED Systems 91 4.3 Analytical Designs and Performance 92 4.3.1 Natural Constituents 92 4.3.1.1 Carbohydrates 92 4.3.1.2 Amino Acids 94 4.3.1.3 Vitamins 96 4.3.1.4 Natural Phenolic Compounds 97 4.3.2 Nonanthropogenic Contaminants 98 4.3.2.1 Biogenic Amines 98 4.3.2.2 Mycotoxins 100 4.3.3 Anthropogenic Contaminants 101 4.3.3.1 Antibiotics 101 4.3.3.2 Pesticides (Herbicides, Insecticides, and Fungicides) 102 4.4 Concluding Remarks 104 References 105 5. Capillary Electrophoresis with Electrochemical Detection 117Gang Chen 5.1 Introduction 117 5.2 Separation Techniques in Agricultural and Food Analysis 118 5.3 ECD in the CE Analysis of Foods and Agricultural Products 119 5.3.1 Amperometric Detection 119 5.3.2 Conductivity Detection and Potentiometric Detection 120 5.4 Instrumentations of CE-ECD 121 5.5 Determination of Nutritions by CE-ECD 122 5.5.1 Amino Acids and Peptides 122 5.5.2 Carbohydrates 124 5.5.3 Vitamins 126 5.5.4 Ions 127 5.6 Determination of Phenolic Compounds by CE-ECD 127 5.6.1 Phenols in Tea 127 5.6.2 Phenols in Coffee 127 5.6.3 Phenols in Wines 127 5.6.4 Phenols in Herbal Drugs 128 5.6.5 Flavones in Herbal Drugs 128 5.7 Determination of Purines by CE-ECD 130 5.8 Determination of Food Additives by CE-ECD 130 5.8.1 Preservatives 130 5.8.2 Antioxidants 131 5.8.3 Colors 131 5.8.4 Artificial Sweeteners 131 5.9 Summary 131 Abbreviations 132 Acknowledgments 132 References 133 Part II Electrochemical Sensing in Food Analysis 137 6. Microelectrode Designs 139Jonathan P. Metters and Craig E. Banks 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 Microfabrication Techniques 142 6.2.1 Lithography and Related Processes (Deposition, Sputtering, Other Relevant Technologies) 142 6.3 Screen-Printing for Producing Electrochemical Sensors 149 6.3.1 Improving Mass Transport 151 6.3.2 Metal Oxide Electrodes, Metal and Nano and Micro Modified Screen-Printed Sensors 159 6.4 Conclusions and Perspectives 161 References 161 7. Potentiometric Sensors 169Geza Nagy and L´ývia Nagy 7.1 Introduction 169 7.2 The Types of Potentiometry 169 7.2.1 Potentiometric Stripping Analysis 170 7.2.2 Zero Current Potentiometry 171 7.2.3 Direct Potentiometry 175 7.2.4 Titrimetric Methods 177 7.3 The Selectivity of Ion-selective Electrodes and Its Determination 178 7.3.1 The Selectivity Coefficient 178 7.3.2 Separate Solution and Mixed Solution Methods 178 7.3.2.1 Separation Solution Methods 179 7.3.2.2 Mixed Solution Methods 180 7.4 Measuring Electrodes Used in Potentiometric Analysis 181 7.4.1 Ion-selective Field Effect Transistors 183 7.4.2 Severinghaus-type Probes 183 7.4.3 Potentiometric Enzyme Electrodes 184 7.5 Special Tasks 185 7.5.1 pH Measurements 185 7.5.2 Miscellaneous Analytical Tasks by Potentiometric Methods 190 7.6 Application of Potentiometric Measurements for Anions 191 7.6.1 Determination of Chloride Ion Concentration 191 7.6.1.1 Measurement of Cl− Concentration in Milk 192 7.6.1.2 Measurement of Cl− Concentration in Meat and Meat Products 192 7.6.1.3 Measurement of Cl− Concentration in Butter 192 7.6.1.4 Measurement of Cl− Concentration in Mayonnaise 192 7.6.1.5 Measurement of Cl− Concentration in Soil Samples 192 7.6.1.6 Chloride Ion Determination in Fruit Juice 193 7.6.2 Determination of Fluoride Ion Concentration 193 7.6.2.1 Fluoride Content of Wines 194 7.6.3 Applications of EPA Methods for Anion and Cation Analysis 194 7.6.4 Determination of Potassium Ion Concentration 195 7.6.5 Determination of Nitrate Ion Concentration 195 7.6.5.1 Nitrate Contain of Vegetables 195 7.6.6 Determination of Calcium Ion Concentration 197 7.6.7 Determination of Sweetening Additive Concentration 197 7.6.8 Determination of Fumaric Acid Concentration 197 7.6.8.1 Measuring the Fumarate Content in Gelatin 197 7.6.9 Quantification of Food Preservatives 198 7.6.9.1 Quantification of Sorbate 198 7.6.9.2 Quantification of Benzoate 198 7.6.10 Determination of Aluminum Ion Concentration 199 7.6.11 Methods for Detecting Histamine 199 References 200 8. Electrochemical Enzyme Biosensors 207Ilaria Palchetti and Marco Mascini 8.1 Introduction 207 8.2 General Features of Enzyme Biosensors 209 8.2.1 Enzyme Biosensor Assembly 212 8.2.2 Enzyme Biosensor Stability 213 8.2.3 Biosensors Based on the Principle of Enzyme Inhibition 213 8.3 Analytical Features of Enzyme Based Biosensors 214 8.3.1 Biosensor Calibration 214 8.3.2 Biosensor Calibration for Determination of Inhibitors 215 8.3.3 Practical Aspects 215 8.3.3.1 Response Time 215 8.3.3.2 Thickness of the Enzyme Layer 216 8.3.3.3 Effect of Additional Membranes 216 8.4 Examples of Electrochemical Enzymatic Biosensors for Food Analysis 216 8.4.1 Detection of Pesticides 217 8.5 Conclusion 219 References 220 9. Electrochemical Immunosensors 223M. Teresa Fernández-Abedul, M. Bego˜na González-Garc´ýa and Agust´ýn Costa-Garc´ýa 9.1 Introduction 223 9.2 Defining the Problem: The Targets 225 9.3 Recognizing the Target 231 9.3.1 Antibodies 231 9.3.2 Antigens 236 9.4 Immunosensing Architectures 236 9.4.1 Components of the Sensing Layer 238 9.4.2 Surface Engineering Procedures 256 9.4.3 Renewable Solid Surfaces 259 9.5 Performing Affinity Interactions for Molecular Recognition 260 9.6 Transducing Immunological Events 263 9.6.1 Electrode Materials and Types 263 9.6.1.1 Film Electrodes 264 9.6.2 Electrochemical Detection Methodologies 266 9.6.2.1 Label-Free Approaches 267 9.6.2.2 Amperometric Response to Labels 270 9.7 Advancing in Real Immunosensing 274 9.7.1 Multiplexed Determinations 275 9.7.2 Automation of Immunosensors 277 9.8 Processing Data 278 9.9 Conclusions 278 Abbreviations 280 References 283 10. Electrochemical Genosensors 295Briza Pérez-López and Arben Merkoçi 10.1 General Introduction on Electrochemical Genosensors 295 10.1.1 Operation Principles 296 10.1.1.1 Label-Free (Direct) Detection 296 10.1.1.2 Label-Based (Indirect) Detection 300 10.2 Detection Methodologies 302 10.2.1 Voltammetric/Stripping 303 10.2.2 Potentiometric 304 10.2.3 Impedimetric 306 10.2.4 Conductometric 306 10.3 Applications 307 10.3.1 Species Identification 307 10.3.2 Contaminant Monitoring 309 10.4 Conclusions and Future Trends 311 Acknowledgments 311 References 311 11. Electrochemical Biosensors Based on Nanomaterials 317Joseph Wang 11.1 Why Nanoscale Materials? 317 11.2 Nanowires, Nanotubes, and Nanoparticles 317 11.3 Nanomaterial-based Electrochemical Biosensors 319 11.3.1 Nanomaterial-based Biocatalytic Sensors 319 11.3.2 Nanomaterial-based Bioaffinity Sensors 321 11.4 Future Prospects 325 References 326 12. Electrochemical Sensing on Microfluidic Chips 331Alberto Escarpa, Mar´ýa Cristina González and Miguel A. López 12.1 Electrochemical Detection Implementation in Microfluidic Chips 331 12.2 Microchip Electrophoresis with Electrochemical Detection for Food Analysis 335 12.2.1 Microchip Electrophoresis with Amperometric Detection for Organic Food Analytes 335 12.2.2 Microchip Electrophoresis with Amperometric Detection for Inorganic Food Analytes 341 12.2.3 Microchip Electrophoresis with Conductometric Detection for Food Analysis 341 12.3 Microfluidic Chips with Nanomaterial-Based Electrochemical Detection for Food Analysis 342 12.4 Microfluidic Electrochemical Biosensing Chips for Food Analysis 346 12.5 Outlook 350 Acknowledgments 351 Acronyms 351 References 352 13. Nanoelectrochemistry Applications Based on Electrospinning 357Matteo Scampicchio, Maria Stella Cosio, Solomon Lemma Mengistu and Saverio Mannino 13.1 A Note on Nanoelectrochemistry 357 13.2 Electrochemical Sensors Modified with Nanofibrous Membranes 358 13.3 Introduction to Electrospinning 359 13.4 Applications of Electrochemical Sensors Based on Electrospinning 361 13.4.1 Nanofibrous Membranes as Coating Material 361 13.4.2 High Permeability 362 13.4.3 Selective Barrier to Diffusion 362 13.4.4 Conducting Nanofibrous Membranes 364 13.4.5 Biosensor Based on Nanofibrous Membranes 369 References 374 14. Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 381Araceli González-Cortés 14.1 Introduction 381 14.2 Impedance Spectroscopy–Theoretical Background 382 14.3 Chemical Sensors 387 14.4 Electrochemical Biosensors Based on Impedance Spectroscopy 390 14.4.1 Enzymatic Biosensors 391 14.4.2 Immunosensors 392 14.4.2.1 Impedimetric Immunosensors Using Interdigitated Array Microelectrodes 403 14.4.3 Genosensors and Aptasensors 406 14.5 Nonelectrochemical Interfacial Impedance 410 14.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 414 References 415 Part III Industrial Implications 421 15. Electroanalysis in Food Process Control 423Maria Stella Cosio, Simona Benedetti, Matteo Scampicchio and Saverio Mannino 15.1 Sensors in Food Process 426 15.2 Electronic Nose 429 15.3 Electronic Nose Technologies 430 15.3.0.1 Metal Oxide Semiconductors 431 15.3.0.2 Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistors 431 15.3.0.3 Conducting Organic Polymers 431 15.3.0.4 Piezoelectric Crystal Sensors 432 15.4 Electronic Noses for the Food Industry 433 15.5 Electronic Tongue 434 15.6 Pattern Recognition Models 436 15.7 Sampling 437 15.8 Conclusions 439 References 439 16. Instrumental Aspects of Food Analysis by Electrochemical Methods 443Wendell K. T. Coltro, Maria F. Mora and Carlos D. Garcia 16.1 Introduction 443 16.2 Principles 444 16.3 Instrumentation for Electrochemical Detection 445 16.3.1 Instruments for Voltammetric Techniques 445 16.3.1.1 Amperometry 445 16.3.1.2 Pulsed Amperometric Detection 446 16.3.1.3 Voltammetry 447 16.3.2 Instrumentation for Potentiometric Techniques 448 16.3.3 Instruments for Conductometric Techniques 449 16.3.4 Instruments Developed for Portability 451 16.3.5 Low-Cost Potentiostats 455 16.3.6 Remotely Controlled Instruments 459 16.3.7 Electrochemical Detectors Coupled to Microchip Capillary Electrophoresis 460 16.4 Conclusions 464 Acknowledgments 464 References 464 Index 479

Read more less

Book SynopsisForensic Ballistics in Court: Interpretation and Presentation of Firearms Evidence is an accessible introduction to firearms and ballistics evidence and how this is analysed and presented as evidence in a court of law. The book approaches the subject in terms of the realities of case work, opening with a clear and illustrated explanation of the correct nomenclature for various weapon types and their parts. Ammunition is also extensively covered, again with annotated illustrations. Basic external and terminal ballistics, wounding capabilities are likewise covered to give an overview of the subject. A key aspect of the book covers the theory and philosophy behind striation matches and the associated statistics, how positive matches should be peer reviewed and the importance accreditation has on this subject. Gunshot residue formation and identification and the various methods used in its analysis are reviewed in depth. This includes a critical examination of the pTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Introduction xv About the companion website xix 1.0 Firearms History 1 1.0.1 Introduction 1 1.0.2 The flintlock 1 1.0.3 The percussion system 3 1.0.4 The pinfire system 3 1.0.5 The rimfire system 4 1.0.6 The Dreyse needle fire system 4 1.0.7 The centre fire system 5 1.0.8 The revolver 5 1.0.9 The self-loading pistol 6 Further reading 8 2.0 Weapon Types and Their Operation 9 2.0.1 Introduction 9 2.0.2 Handguns 9 2.0.3 Rifles 13 2.0.4 Shotguns 14 2.0.5 Combination weapons 15 2.0.6 Sub-machine guns 15 2.0.7 Assault rifles 16 2.0.8 Machine guns and heavy machine guns 16 2.0.9 Muzzle attachments 16 2.0.10 Important parts of a weapons mechanism 19 2.0.11 Bent and sear 20 2.0.12 Other important parts of a revolver mechanism 22 2.0.13 Hand and ratchet 23 Further reading 24 2.1 Gas and Air Powered Weapons 25 2.1.1 Introduction 25 2.1.2 Weapon types 25 2.1.3 Ammunition 28 2.1.4 Considerations 30 Further reading 31 2.2 Rifling Types and Their Identification 33 2.2.1 Introduction 33 2.2.2 Basics 34 2.2.3 Class characteristics 37 2.2.4 General introduction to rifling 38 Additional reading 42 2.3 Home-made, Improvised and Converted Firearms 43 2.3.1 Introduction 43 2.3.2 Improvised firearms 43 2.3.3 Converting air weapons 44 2.3.4 Home-made and converted toys and replica weapons 45 2.3.5 Home-made ammunition 48 Further reading 50 2.4 Antique Weapons 51 2.4.1 Introduction 51 2.4.2 Background 51 2.4.3 Defining ‘antique’ 52 3.0 Proof Marks 55 3.0.1 Introduction 55 3.0.2 Proof marks 55 3.0.3 Types of proof 56 3.0.4 Proof marks and the examiner 56 3.0.5 Examples of proof marks 56 Further reading 61 4.0 A Brief History of Ammunition 63 4.0.1 Introduction 63 4.0.2 Basics 63 Further reading 66 4.1 Ammunition Components 67 4.1.1 Introduction 67 4.1.2 Basics 67 4.1.3 Ammunition types 68 4.1.4 Primer cap types 69 4.1.5 Cartridge cases 70 4.1.6 Shotgun ammunition 73 Further reading 79 4.2 Bullet Types 81 4.2.1 Introduction 81 4.2.2 Basics 81 4.2.3 Bullet materials 81 4.2.4 Other bullet types 83 4.2.5 Bullet nose configuration 83 4.2.6 Bullet base configuration 85 4.2.7 Bullet lubrication 85 Further reading 86 4.3 Headstamps and Other Identifying Features on Ammunition 87 4.3.1 Introduction 87 4.3.2 Basics 88 4.3.3 Clandestine ammunition 89 4.3.4 Colour coding of ammunition 90 Further reading 91 4.4 Non-toxic and Frangible Bullets 93 4.4.1 Introduction 93 4.4.2 Elimination of lead in ammunition 93 4.4.3 Materials used in non-toxic ammunition 94 4.4.4 The current situation 94 Further reading 96 4.5 Non-toxic Shot 97 4.5.1 Introduction 97 4.5.2 Materials used in non-toxic shotgun ammunition 97 Suggested further reading 100 4.6 A Brief History of Propellants 101 4.6.1 Introduction 101 4.6.2 Basics 101 4.6.3 Black powder 102 4.6.4 Nitro propellants 104 4.6.5 Dating of ammunition 107 4.6.6 Reduced loads for target shooting 107 Further reading 108 4.7 Priming Compounds 109 4.7.1 Introduction 109 4.7.2 Basics 110 4.7.3 A short history of priming compounds 110 4.7.4 Manufacture 113 4.7.5 Accidental discharge of primers 113 Further reading 114 5.0 An Introduction to Ballistics 115 5.0.1 Introduction 115 5.0.2 Basics 115 5.0.3 Background 115 Further reading 116 5.1 Internal Ballistics 117 5.1.1 Introduction 117 5.1.2 Basics 117 5.1.3 Recoil 118 5.1.4 Barrel pressure 120 Further reading 121 5.2 External Ballistics 123 5.2.1 Introduction 123 5.2.2 Basics 124 5.2.3 Maximum range of missiles 126 5.2.4 Maximum altitude that a bullet will attain 130 5.2.5 Terminal velocity 131 5.2.6 Use of sight to compensate for bullet drop 132 5.2.7 Other influencing factors 132 5.2.8 Muzzle energy 134 5.2.9 Momentum 135 Further reading 135 5.3 Terminal Ballistics 137 5.3.1 Introduction 137 5.3.2 Basics 137 5.3.3 General wound ballistic concepts 139 5.3.4 Other factors influencing the wounding capabilities of a missile 144 5.3.5 Bullet performance and ‘wounding capabilities’ 145 5.3.6 Relative stopping power (RSP) 147 5.3.7 Bullet resistant vests (BRV) 149 Further reading 152 6.0 A Brief History of Forensic Firearms Identification 153 6.0.1 Introduction 153 6.0.2 Early cases involving bullet identification 154 6.0.3 Use of photomicrographs 154 6.0.4 Identification of weapon from breech face markings 155 6.0.5 Early use of comparison microscope 155 6.0.6 Introduction of the binocular comparison microscope 156 6.0.7 Improvements in illumination 157 6.0.8 Photography of stria 157 6.0.9 Modern technology for stria comparison 157 Suggested further reading 160 7.0 Basic Concepts of Striation Matching 161 7.0.1 Introduction 161 7.0.2 Basics 162 7.0.3 Identification of weapon type 164 7.0.4 Individual characteristics on cartridge cases 165 7.0.5 Formation of stria 166 7.0.6 Problematical areas 167 Further reading 172 7.1 Basic Concepts in Comparison Microscopy 173 7.1.1 Introduction 173 7.1.2 Basic methodology and background to stria comparisons 174 7.1.3 Lighting used for comparison microscopy 175 7.1.4 The concept of consecutive matching stria 177 7.1.5 Obtaining control samples 177 7.1.6 Manufacturing marks on ammunition 178 7.1.7 Recovery methods for fired bullets 178 7.1.8 Conclusion 180 Further reading 181 7.2 The Concept of Consecutive Matching Stria 183 7.2.1 Introduction 183 7.2.2 Basics 183 7.2.3 Arguments for and against the concept of stria comparisons 186 Further reading 187 7.3 A Statistical Model to Illustrate the Concept of Individuality in Striation Matches 189 7.3.1 Introduction 189 7.3.2 Basics 189 7.3.3 Stria individuality 190 7.3.4 Philosophy 191 References 193 8.0 Accidental Discharge 195 8.0.1 Introduction 195 8.0.2 Basics 197 8.0.3 Trigger mechanisms 197 8.0.4 Reasons for an accidental discharge 198 8.0.5 Negligent discharges 203 Further reading 204 9.0 Identification of Calibre from the Bullet Entry Hole 205 9.0.1 Introduction 205 9.0.2 Basics 206 9.0.3 Determination of bullet type 207 Further reading 208 10.0 Ricochet Analysis 209 10.0.1 Introduction 209 10.0.2 Basics 209 10.0.3 Variables influencing the liability of a missile to ricochet 210 Further reading 213 11.0 Bullet Penetration and Trajectory through Glass 215 11.0.1 Introduction 215 11.0.2 Glass types and glass substitutes 215 11.0.3 Deviation of missile after penetrating glass 217 11.0.4 Penetration of normal window glass 217 11.0.5 Penetration of laminated and bullet-resistant glass 218 11.0.6 Penetration of tempered or toughened glass 219 11.0.7 Determination of bullet type from the entry hole 220 11.0.8 Deflection of bullet by glass 221 Further reading and references 223 12.0 Range of Firing Estimations and Bullet Hole Examinations 225 12.0.1 Introduction 225 12.0.2 Basics 225 12.0.3 Range of firing estimations for pistols and rifles 227 12.0.4 Extended range of fire estimations 230 12.0.5 Range of firing estimations on badly decomposed bodies 231 12.0.6 Bullet wipe marks 231 12.1 Chemical Tests for Range of Fire Estimations and Bullet Entry/Exit Hole Identification 235 12.1.1 Introduction 235 12.1.2 Chemical tests for range of firing estimations 235 12.1.3 Range of firing estimations on heavily bloodstained garments 237 12.1.4 Range of firing estimations for non-toxic non-lead primers 238 Further reading 239 12.2 Range of Fire Estimations for Shotguns 241 12.2.1 Introduction 241 12.2.2 Basics 242 12.2.3 Shotgun cartridges fired in revolvers 246 Suggested further reading 247 13.0 The Use of X-ray Photography for Projectile Identification 249 13.0.1 Introduction 249 13.0.2 Estimation of calibre from X-ray photographs 250 Further reading 254 14.0 Gunshot Residue Examination 255 14.0.1 Introduction 255 14.0.2 Basics 256 14.0.3 Identification of GSR Particles 257 14.0.4 The use of the scanning electron microscope (SEM) with energy dispersive X-Ray analysis (EDX) for the detection and analysis of GSR particles 259 14.0.5 Sample collection 260 14.0.6 GSR retention 263 14.0.7 Interpretation of results 264 14.0.8 Identification of type of ammunition and country or origin from GSR composition 265 14.0.9 Environmental contaminants 267 14.0.10 Extending the period over which GSR particles can be recovered 269 14.0.11 General considerations to be made when examining GSR analysis results 272 14.0.12 Discussion 274 References 275 15.0 Gun Handling Tests 277 15.0.1 Introduction 277 15.0.2 History 278 15.0.3 Methodology for the use of Ferrozine 279 Further reading 283 16.0 Laser-etched Serial Numbers and Bar Codes 285 16.0.1 Introduction 285 16.0.2 Laser-etched serial numbers 285 16.0.3 Bar codes 286 16.0.4 Conclusion 287 Further reading 287 17.0 Classification of Firearms-related Death 289 17.0.1 Introduction 289 17.0.2 Basics 289 17.0.3 Multiple shot suicides 290 References and further reading 293 18.0 Practical Considerations in a Firearms Case from a Legal Point of View 295 18.0.1 Introduction 295 18.0.2 Key questions 296 18.0.3 Legal challenges to forensic firearms evidence in the USA 298 18.0.4 Conclusion 300 Further reading and references 300 19.0 Qualifying the Expert and Cross-examination Questions 301 19.0.1 Definition 301 19.0.2 Introduction 301 19.0.3 Qualifying the expert 302 19.0.4 General background questions 303 19.0.5 Comparison microscopy 303 19.0.6 Gunshot residue 306 19.0.7 Ferrozine test 308 Further reading 308 20.0 Chain of Custody 309 20.0.1 Introduction 309 20.0.2 Basics 309 20.0.3 Process 310 20.0.4 In court 310 Further reading 311 Appendix 1 Standard of Review: ‘Daubert Trilogy’ 313 Appendix 2 Commercial and General Abbreviations for Bullet Configurations 317 Appendix 3 Some of the More Common Trade Names 323 Appendix 4 Important dates in the History of Firearms from 1247 335 Appendix 5 Dates for the Introduction of Various Cartridges by Calibre 341 Appendix 6 Some Trademarks Found on Guns 345 Appendix 7 General Firearms Values Conversion Table 349 Appendix 8 Hearing Loss 351 Appendix 9 A List of Handgun Cartridges 355 Appendix 10 A List of Rifle Cartridges 357 Appendix 11 Air Weapon Legislation 361 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisThisbook covers all aspects of environmental trace analysis from sampling through to preparation of the sample to the analytical techniques used to quantify the level of trace metals or organic compounds. The book is divided into two areas: sample preparation for inorganic analysis and sample preparation for organic analysis. This allows the reader to focus on key aspects related to the preparation of samples for their subsequent analysis. Selected case studies provide the reader with the opportunity to consider how the sample preparation approach can be optimized for their own area of expertise.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii Acknowledgements xix Acronyms and Abbreviations xxi 1 Basic Laboratory Procedures 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Health and Safety Issues 2 1.3 Sample Handling: Solid Samples 4 1.4 Sample Handling: Liquid Samples 4 1.5 Sample Handling: Gases/Vapour Samples 5 1.6 Summary 5 2 Investigative Approach for Environmental Analysis 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Recording of Practical Results 7 2.3 Significant Figures 9 2.4 Units 12 2.5 Summary 13 3 Principles of Quantitative Environmental Analysis 21 3.1 Introduction 21 3.2 Preparing Solutions for Quantitative Work 23 3.3 Calibration Graphs 24 3.4 Limits of Detection/Quantitation 27 3.5 Calculations: Dilution or Concentration Factors 27 3.6 Quality Assurance 29 3.7 Summary 36 4 Environmental Sampling 37 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 Sampling Soil (and Sediments) 39 4.3 Sampling Water 40 4.4 Sampling Air 42 4.5 Summary 44 5 Storage of Samples for Analysis 45 5.1 Introduction 45 5.2 Choice of Storage Container for Liquid Samples 45 5.3 Preservation Techniques for Liquid Samples 47 5.4 Storage and Preservation of Solid Samples 48 5.5 Storage and Preservation of Gaseous Samples 48 5.6 Summary 50 6 Preparation of Environmental Solid Samples for Inorganic Analysis 51 6.1 Introduction 51 6.2 Decomposition Techniques 53 6.3 Selective Extraction Methods 64 6.4 Physiologically-Based Extraction Test or In Vitro Gastrointestinal Extraction 70 6.5 Earthworms 72 6.6 Summary 75 7 Preparation of Environmental Liquid Samples for Inorganic Analysis 81 7.1 Introduction 81 7.2 Liquid-Liquid Extraction of Metals 82 7.3 Ion Exchange 83 7.4 Co-precipitation 84 7.5 Summary 84 8 Preparation of Environmental Solid Samples for Organic Analysis 85 8.1 Introduction 85 8.2 Liquid-Solid Extraction 85 8.3 Pressurised Fluid Extraction 91 8.4 Microwave-Assisted Extraction 100 8.5 Supercritical Fluid Extraction 103 8.6 Matrix Solid Phase Dispersion 107 8.7 Physiologically-Based Extraction Test or In Vitro Gastrointestinal Extraction 108 8.8 A Comparison of Extraction Techniques 109 8.9 Summary 112 9 Preparation of Environmental Liquid Samples for Organic Analysis 115 9.1 Introduction 115 9.2 Liquid–Liquid Extraction 116 9.3 Solid Phase Extraction 120 9.4 Purge and Trap Extraction 127 9.5 Headspace Extraction 128 9.6 Solid Phase Microextraction 132 9.7 Stir-Bar Sorptive Extraction 135 9.8 Microextraction in a Packed Syringe 137 9.9 Liquid Phase Microextraction 139 9.10 Membrane Extraction 140 9.11 A Comparison of Extraction Techniques 143 9.12 Summary 143 10 Preparation of Environmental Air Samples for Organic Analysis 145 10.1 Introduction 145 10.2 Thermal Desorption 147 10.3 Summary 148 11 Pre-concentration and Clean-up Procedures for Organic Sample Extracts 149 11.1 Introduction 149 11.2 Methods for Solvent Evaporation 149 11.3 Sample Extract Clean-up Procedures 151 11.4 Summary 154 12 Instrumental Techniques for Environmental Trace Analysis 157 12.1 Introduction 157 12.2 Environmental Inorganic Analysis 157 12.3 Environmental Organic Analysis 176 12.4 Other Techniques for Environmental Organic Analysis 188 12.5 Portable Techniques for Field Measurements 189 12.6 Summary 195 13 Selected Case Studies 197 13.4 Sequential Extraction of Metals from Soils 201 13.5 Oral Bioaccessibility Testing of Metals from Soils 204 13.6 Pressurised Fluid Extraction of Organic Compounds from Soils 206 13.7 Solid Phase Extraction of Organic Compounds from Liquid Samples 210 13.8 Headspace Solid Phase Microextraction of Organic Compounds 211 13.9 Dynamic Headspace Analysis of Organic Compounds 215 13.10 An Environmental Case Study: From Site to Analysis to Data Interpretation and Contextualisation 217 13.11 Summary 232 References 237 14 Some Numerical Worked Examples 239 14.1 Introduction 239 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides valuable insights into the wide scope of electrochemistry and gives details of the current status and its applications in industrial processes and consumer devices.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgement xv 1 Introduction to Electrochemical Sustainable Processes 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Effluent Treatment and Recycling 3 1.3 Green Electrochemistry 3 1.4 Electrochemistry and Energy Sustainability 4 1.5 Hydrogen Economy and Fuel Cells 7 1.6 Conclusions 24 References 25 2 Electrochemistry, Electrocatalysis and Thermodynamics 27 2.1 The Electrochemical Cell 27 2.2 Electrochemical Thermodynamics 29 2.3 Types of Electrochemical Reactions 38 2.4 Mass Transport and Electrochemical Reactions 49 2.5 Photoelectrochemistry 73 2.6 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 80 References 84 3 Electrochemical Cells, Materials and Reactors 87 3.1 Electrochemical Reactors 87 3.2 Fuel Cells 97 3.3 Batteries 101 3.4 Capacitors 103 3.5 Electrochemical Cell Engineering 106 References 124 4 Carbon Dioxide Reduction and Electro-Organic Synthesis 125 4.1 Electrochemical Reduction of Carbon Dioxide 125 4.2 Organic Synthesis 143 4.3 Green Electro-Organic Synthesis 151 4.4 Conclusions 156 References 157 5 Hydrogen Production andWater Electrolysis 159 5.1 Fossil Fuel Based Hydrogen Production 160 5.2 Hydrogen via Electrolysis 161 5.3 Photoelectrolysis 184 5.4 Thermal and Electrochemical Generation of Hydrogen fromWater 191 5.5 Chemical Production of Hydrogen 200 5.6 Conclusions 200 References 201 6 Inorganic Synthesis 203 6.1 Chemicals from the Electrolysis of Halides 203 6.2 Electrolytic Processes for Metal Processing 216 6.3 Inorganic Compounds and Salts 220 6.4 Generation of Chemical Oxidants 223 6.5 Conclusions 231 References 231 7 Electrochemical Energy Storage and Power Sources 233 7.1 Batteries 233 7.2 Supercapacitors 266 7.3 Biological Fuel Cells 271 References 287 8 Electrochemical Energy Systems and Power Sources: Fuel Cells 291 8.1 Introduction 291 8.2 Principle of Fuel Cell Operation 294 8.3 Fuel Cell Systems 296 8.4 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 300 8.5 Alkaline Fuel Cells 320 8.6 Medium and High Temperature Fuel Cells 326 8.7 Direct Alcohol Fuel Cells 344 8.8 Unitized Fuel Cells 356 References 359 9 Electrochemical Processes for Recycling and Resource Recovery 363 9.1 Electrochemical Membrane Separations 363 9.2 Electrochemical Oxidations 380 9.3 Recovery and Recycling of Dissolved Metals 381 References 383 Index 385

Read more less